Volvo 2011 XC60 Owner's Manual Owners

User Manual: Volvo 2011 XC60 Owner's Manual 2011 Volvo XC60 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 360 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

VOLVO XC60

Owner's Manual Web Edition

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you

will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile

designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you

to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating

instructions in this manual.

We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times

in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a

vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impair-

ment that could hinder your ability to drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and

emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle,

please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting

Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on get-

ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents

00 Introduction

Important information................................. 8

Environment.............................................. 12

Important warnings................................... 13

01 Safety

Occupant safety........................................ 16

Reporting safety defects........................... 17

Seat belts ................................................. 18

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 21

Occupant Weight Sensor ......................... 26

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 30

Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 32

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 33

Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ......... 35

Crash mode.............................................. 36

Child safety............................................... 37

Child restraint systems............................. 39

Infant seats............................................... 41

Convertible seats...................................... 43

Booster cushions...................................... 45

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 46

Top tether anchors.................................... 47

Child restraint registration and recalls...... 48

Integrated booster cushion....................... 49

Child safety locks...................................... 52

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade....................... 56

Keyless drive............................................. 63

Locks........................................................ 66

Alarm......................................................... 69

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls.......................... 74

Ignition modes.......................................... 81

Seats......................................................... 82

Steering wheel.......................................... 88

Lighting..................................................... 89

Wipers and washers................................. 95

Power windows......................................... 98

Mirrors..................................................... 100

Compass*............................................... 102

Laminated panoramic roof*.................... 103

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*... 106

Starting the engine.................................. 109

Transmission........................................... 112

Brakes..................................................... 115

Parking brake.......................................... 118

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.................... 121

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages............................. 126

The MY CAR menus............................... 128

Climate system....................................... 134

Trip computer......................................... 142

Stability system....................................... 144

Active chassis system–Four C*............... 146

Cruise control.......................................... 147

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*.............. 149

Distance Alert* ....................................... 159

City Safety™ .......................................... 162

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection*............................. 168

Driver Alert System* ............................... 175

Park assist*............................................. 181

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ............ 185

Blind Spot Information System*.............. 189

Passenger compartment convenience... 193

05 Infotainment

Introduction............................................. 200

Getting started ....................................... 202

General infotainment functions .............. 207

Radio....................................................... 210

Media player........................................... 219

AUX/USB sockets................................... 223

Bluetooth media ................................... 226

Bluetooth® hands-free connection ........ 229

Cell phone voice control......................... 237

Infotainment system menus ................... 241

Contents

06 During your trip

Driving recommendations....................... 246

Refueling................................................. 250

Loading................................................... 255

Cargo area ............................................. 259

Towing a trailer....................................... 262

Emergency towing.................................. 265

07 Wheels and tires

General information ............................... 270

Tire inflation............................................. 273

Inflation pressure—U.S. models ............ 275

Inflation pressure—Canadian models..... 276

Tire designations .................................... 277

Glossary of tire terminology ................... 279

Vehicle loading ....................................... 280

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ................. 282

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires . 283

Temporary Spare ................................... 284

Tire Sealing System................................ 285

Changing a wheel .................................. 291

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 294

08 Maintenance and

specifications

Volvo maintenance.................................. 300

Maintaining your car............................... 301

Hood and engine compartment.............. 303

Engine oil................................................ 304

Fluids...................................................... 306

Replacing bulbs...................................... 308

Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 315

Battery..................................................... 317

Fuses...................................................... 320

Vehicle care............................................. 328

Contents

09 Specifications

Label information.................................... 336

Specifications......................................... 338

Overview of information and warning sym-

bols......................................................... 345

Volvo programs....................................... 348

10 Index

Index....................................................... 350

Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo

In the USA:

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada:

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

About this manual

•Before you operate your vehicle for the first

time, please familiarize yourself with the

information found in the chapters "Your

Driving Environment" and "During Your

Trip."

•Information contained in the balance of the

manual is extremely useful and should be

read after operating the vehicle for the first

time.

•The manual is structured so that it can be

used for reference. For this reason, it

should be kept in the vehicle for ready

access.

Footnotes

Certain pages of this manual contain informa-

tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of

the page. This information supplements the

text that the footnote number refers to (a letter

is used if the footnote refers to text in a table).

Display texts

There are several displays in the driver’s field

of vision that show messages generated by

various systems and functions in the vehicle.

These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man-

ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur-

rounding text and are printed in gray, (for

example: Doors automatic lock).

Decals

There are various types of decals in the vehicle

whose purpose is to provide important infor-

mation in a clear and concise way. The impor-

tance of these decals is explained as follows,

in descending order of importance.

Risk of injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-

ground, white text/image on a black back-

ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate

potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this

type could result in serious injury or death.

Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black or blue warning background and space

for a message. If the information on decals of

this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle

could result.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black background. These decals provide gen-

eral information.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual

are examples only and are not intended to

be reproductions of the decals actually used

in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi-

cation of how they look and their approxi-

mate location in the vehicle. The applicable

information for your particular vehicle can

be found on the respective decals in the

vehicle.

Types of lists used in the manual

Procedures

Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or

actions that must be carried out in a certain

order, are arranged in numbered lists in this

manual.

If there is a series of illustrations associated

with step-by-step instructions, each step

in the procedure is numbered in the same

way as the corresponding illustration.

Lists in which letters are used can be found

with series of illustrations in cases where

the order in which the instructions are car-

ried out is not important.

Arrows with or without numbers are used

to indicate the direction of a movement.

If there are no illustrations associated with a

step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure

are indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used

in general overview illustrations in which

certain components are pointed out. The

corresponding number is also used in the

position list's description of the various

components.

Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists

Bullets are used to differentiate a number of

components/functions/points of information

that can be listed in random order.

For example:

•Coolant

•Engine oil

Continued

This symbol can be found at the lower right

corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page

to indicate that the current topic is continued

on the following page.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described in

this manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not be

available in all countries or markets. Please

note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on special legal require-

ments.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor-

mation.

NOTE

•All information, illustrations and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are

based on the latest product information

available at the time of publication.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change spec-

ifications or design without notice and

without incurring obligation.

•Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-

try's applicable safety and emission

control requirements. In some cases it

may be difficult or impossible to comply

with these requirements. Modifications

to the emission control system(s) may

render your Volvo not certifiable for

legal operation in the U.S., Canada and

other countries.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,

unseen damage may affect its drivability

and safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain

fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such as

air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,

adaptive steering columns, and button cell

batteries may contain Perchlorate material.

Special handling may apply for service or

vehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.

Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock

When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector

is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the

selector from this position, the ignition must be

in mode II (see page 81) or the engine must

be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the

button on the front side of the gear selector and

move the selector from P (Park).

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnos-

tic test when the engine has been started and

driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-

matic test may be performed when the vehicle

first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several

times and a sound may be audible from the

ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel (see

the illustration on page 252) when the vehicle

is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.

Please note that the fuel filler door will remain

unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-

ward. An audible click will be heard when the

fuel filler door relocks.

Fuel filler cap

The fuel filler door, located on the right rear

quarter panel, is connected to your vehicle's

central locking system.

Points to keep in mind

•Do not export your Volvo to another coun-

try before investigating that country's

applicable safety and exhaust emission

requirements. In some cases it may be dif-

ficult or impossible to comply with these

requirements. Modifications to the emis-

sion control system(s) may render your

Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in

the U.S., Canada and other countries.

•All information, illustrations and specifica-

tions contained in this manual are based on

the latest product information available at

the time of publication. Please note that

some vehicles may be equipped differ-

ently, depending on special legal require-

ments. Optional equipment described in

this manual may not be available in all mar-

kets.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change specifi-

cations or design without notice and with-

out incurring obligation.

Vehicle event data (Black box)

Your vehicle's driving and safety systems

employ computers that monitor, and share

with each other, information about your vehi-

cle's operation. One or more of these comput-

ers may store what they monitor, either during

normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near-

crash event. Stored information may be read

and used by:

•Volvo Car Corporation

•service and repair facilities

•law enforcement or government agencies

•others who may assert a legal right to

know, or who obtain your consent to know

such information.

Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-

tomers. As a natural part of this commitment,

we care about the environment in which we all

live. Caring for the environment means an

everyday involvement in reducing our environ-

mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities

are based on a holistic view, which means we

consider the overall environmental impact of a

product throughout its complete life cycle. In

this context, design, production, product use,

and recycling are all important considerations.

In production, Volvo has partly or completely

phased out several chemicals including CFCs,

lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and

reduced the number of chemicals used in our

plants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into

production a three-way catalytic converter with

a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen

sensor, in 1976. The current version of this

highly efficient system reduces emissions of

harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the

exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and

the search to eliminate the remaining emis-

sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile

manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for

the air conditioning system of all models as far

back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-

tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are

bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

continuous environmental refinement of con-

ventional gasoline-powered internal combus-

tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at

advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-

ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on

the environment. To reduce your vehicle's

environmental impact, you can:

•Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.

Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-

omy with improperly inflated tires.

•Follow the recommended maintenance

schedule in your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet.

•Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-

sible.

•See a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician as soon as possible for inspec-

tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-

cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the

vehicle has started.

•Properly dispose of any vehicle-related

waste such as used motor oil, used batter-

ies, brake pads, etc.

•When cleaning your vehicle, please use

genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo

car care products are formulated to be

environmentally friendly.

Recycling

As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environ-

ment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recy-

cled in an environmentally sound way. Almost

the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that

reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested

to contact a Volvo retailer for information about

approved and certified recycling facilities.

Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everything

possible to ensure his or her own safety and

the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth-

ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions

is part of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activities

that are not directly related to controlling the

vehicle in the driving environment. Your new

Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-

ture-rich entertainment and communication

systems. These include hands-free cellular tel-

ephones, navigation systems, and multipur-

pose audio systems. You may also own other

portable electronic devices for your own con-

venience. When used properly and safely, they

enrich the driving experience. Improperly used,

any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide the

following warning that reflects the strong Volvo

concern for your safety. Never use these devi-

ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way that

distracts you from the task of driving safely.

Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In

addition to this general warning, we offer the

following guidance regarding specific newer

features that may be found in your vehicle:

•Never use a hand-held cellular telephone

while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while the

vehicle is moving.

•If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-

tion system, set and make changes to your

travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.

•Never program your audio system while

the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-

sets with the vehicle parked, and use your

programmed presets to make radio use

quicker and simpler.

•Never use portable computers or personal

digital assistants while the vehicle is mov-

ing.

Accessory installation

•We strongly recommend that Volvo owners

install only genuine, Volvo-approved

accessories, and that accessory installa-

tions be performed only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to

ensure compatibility with the performance,

safety, and emission systems in your vehi-

cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician knows where

accessories may and may not be safely

installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please

consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician before installing any acces-

sory in or on your vehicle.

•Accessories that have not been approved

by Volvo may or may not be specifically

tested for compatibility with your vehicle.

Additionally, an inexperienced installer

may not be familiar with some of your car's

systems.

•Any of your car's performance and safety

systems could be adversely affected if you

install accessories that Volvo has not tes-

ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal-

led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi-

cle.

•Damage caused by unapproved or

improperly installed accessories may not

be covered by your new vehicle warranty.

See your Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for more warranty

information. Volvo assumes no responsi-

bility for death, injury, or expenses that

may result from the installation of non-gen-

uine accessories.

Occupant safety...................................................................................... 16

Reporting safety defects......................................................................... 17

Seat belts ............................................................................................... 18

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ................................................... 21

Occupant Weight Sensor ....................................................................... 26

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ................................................... 30

Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 32

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS................................................... 33

Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ....................................................... 35

Crash mode............................................................................................ 36

Child safety............................................................................................. 37

Child restraint systems........................................................................... 39

Infant seats.............................................................................................. 41

Convertible seats.................................................................................... 43

Booster cushions.................................................................................... 45

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors................................................................. 46

Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 47

Child restraint registration and recalls.................................................... 48

Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... 49

Child safety locks.................................................................................... 52

SAFETY

01 Safety

Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety

Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern

dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled

off the production line. Three-point seat belts

(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-

absorbing impact zones were designed into

Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable

or required by government regulation.

We will not compromize our commitment to

safety. We continue to seek out new safety

features and to refine those already in our vehi-

cles. You can help. We would appreciate hear-

ing your suggestions about improving automo-

bile safety. We also want to know if you ever

have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us

in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:

1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how

old you are but rather on:

•How well you see.

•Your ability to concentrate.

•How quickly you make decisions under

stress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to help

you cope with the ever changing traffic envi-

ronment.

•Never drink and drive.

•If you are taking any medication, consult

your physician about its potential effects

on your driving abilities.

•Take a driver-retraining course.

•Have your eyes checked regularly.

•Keep your windshield and headlights

clean.

•Replace wiper blades when they start to

leave streaks.

•Take into account the traffic, road, and

weather conditions, particularly with

regard to stopping distance.

01 Safety

Reporting safety defects

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer-

ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems

between you, your retailer, or Volvo

Cars of North America, LLC. To con-

tact NHTSA, you may either call the

Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-

portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from:

http://www.safercar.gov

Volvo strongly recommends that if

your vehicle is covered under a serv-

ice campaign, safety or emission

recall or similar action, it should be

completed as soon as possible.

Please check with your local retailer

or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

if your vehicle is covered under these

conditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT

(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect that

could cause a crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars

of Canada Corp.

To contact Transport Canada, call

(800) 333 – 0510, or (613) 993 – 9851 if you are

calling from the Ottawa region.

01 Safety

Seat belts

General information

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-

pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop-

erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster

seat determined by age, weight and height.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in the

front seat of a vehicle.

Most states and provinces make it mandatory

for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners

that reduce slack in the belts. These preten-

sioners are triggered in situations where the

front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer-

tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts

also include a tension reducing device which,

in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces

exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.

Fastening a seat belt

Buckling

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch

plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is

heard. The seat belt retractor is normally

"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided

that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

Seat belt retractor

The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol-

lowing situations:

•if the belt is pulled out rapidly

•during braking and acceleration

•if the vehicle is leaning excessively

•when driving in turns

•if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti-

vated

NOTE

Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)

is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,

which is designed to help keep the seat belt

taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is

pulled out as far as possible. If this is done,

a sound from the seat belt retractor will be

audible, which is normal, and the seat belt

will be pulled taut and locked in place. This

function is automatically disabled when the

seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.

See also page 38 for information about using

a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a

child seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:

•The belt should not be twisted or turned.

•The lap section of the belt must be posi-

tioned low on the hips (not pressing against

the abdomen).

•Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled

up into its retractor and that the shoulder

and lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt

To remove the seat belt, press the red section

on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the

vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully

after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the

belt back into the retractor slot.

01 Safety

Seat belts

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are in

good condition. Use water and a mild deter-

gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism

function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull

rapidly on the strap.

WARNING

Never use a seat belt for more than one

occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion

of the belt under the arm, behind the back

or otherwise out of position. Such use could

cause injury in the event of an accident. As

seat belts lose much of their strength when

exposed to violent stretching, they should

be replaced after any collision, even if they

appear to be undamaged.

WARNING

•Never repair the belt yourself; have this

work done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

•Any device used to induce slack into the

shoulder belt portion of the three-point

belt system will have a detrimental

effect on the amount of protection avail-

able to you in the event of a collision.

•The seat back should not be tilted too

far back. The shoulder belt must be taut

in order to function properly.

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that children who have outgrown these

devices sit in the rear seat with the seat

belt properly fastened.

Seat belt reminder

G017726

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audible

signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir-

ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that

alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their

seat belts. The audible signal and indicator

light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the

time the ignition is switched on, regardless of

whether or not the seat belts are fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the

vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and

warning light will be active for a total of 6 sec-

onds.

Rear seats

The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two

additional functions:

01 Safety

Seat belts

•It provides information about which seat

belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-

sage will appear in the information display

when a belt is being used. This message

will disappear after approximately 6 sec-

onds or can be erased by pressing the

READ button on the left steering wheel

lever.

•It also provides a reminder if one of the

occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled

his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in

motion. A visual and audible signal will be

given. These signals will stop when the

seat belt has been re-buckled or can be

stopped by pressing the READ button.

•The message Unbelted in rear seat will

appear in the information display if one of

the rear doors has been opened.

The message in the information display can

always be accessed, even if it has been erased,

by pressing the READ button to display stored

messages.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

G020998

The seat belt should always be worn during

pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the

correct way. The diagonal section should wrap

over the shoulder then be routed between the

breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap

section should lay flat over the thighs and as

low as possible under the belly. It must never

be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack

from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the

body without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the

vehicle as they drive (which means they must

be able to easily operate the foot pedals and

steering wheel). Within this context, they

should strive to position the seat with as large

a distance as possible between their belly and

the steering wheel.

Child seats

Please refer to page 39 for information on

securing child seats with the seat belts.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

General information

Warning symbols in the instrument panel

As an enhancement to the three-point seat

belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-

mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS

consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-

bags, side impact airbags, a front passenger

occupant weight sensor, and inflatable cur-

tains. All of these systems are monitored by the

SRS control module. An SRS warning light in

the instrument panel (see the illustration) illu-

minates when the ignition is in modes I, II, or

III, and will normally go out after approximately

6 seconds if no faults are detected in the sys-

tem.

Where applicable, a text message will also be

displayed when the SRS warning light illumi-

nates. If this warning symbol is not functioning

properly, the general warning symbol illumi-

nates and a text message will be displayed.

See also page 58.

> The alarm indicator on the dashboard

will begin flashing to show that the alarm

has been armed.

Opening the tailgate manually

The tailgate is held closed by an electronic

locking mechanism. To open:

1. Press lightly on the rubberized plate under

the handle to release the lock.

2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate.

CAUTION

•When pressing the rubberized plate,

only light pressure is necessary to

release the tailgate's electronic locking

mechanism.

•When opening the tailgate, pull it up

using the handle. Too much pressure on

the rubberized plate can damage its

electrical connections.

1This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 255).

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

The alarm system

The alarm is automatically armed whenever the

vehicle is locked with the remote key or

optional Personal Car Communicator.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitors

a number of points on the vehicle. The follow-

ing conditions will trigger the alarm:

•The hood is forced open.

•The tailgate is forced open.

•A door is forced open.

•The ignition slot is tampered with.

•An attempt is made to start the vehicle with

a non-approved key (a key not coded to

the car's ignition).

•If there is movement in the passenger com-

partment (if the vehicle is equipped with

the accessory movement sensor).

•The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle

is equipped with the accessory inclination

sensor).

•The battery is disconnected (while the

alarm is armed).

•The siren is disconnected when the alarm

is disarmed.

A message will appear in the information dis-

play if a fault should occur in the alarm system.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair any of the compo-

nents in the alarm system yourself. This

could affect the insurance policy on the

vehicle.

The alarm indicator light

The status of the alarm system is indicated by

the red indicator light on the dashboard (see

illustration):

•Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed

•The indicator light flashes at one-second

intervals – the alarm is armed

•The indicator light flashes rapidly before

the remote key is inserted in the ignition

slot and the ignition is put in mode I—the

alarm has been triggered.

Arming the alarm

Press the Lock button on the remote key.

One long flash of the turn signals will con-

firm that the alarm is armed.

Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in

MY CAR, under Car settings Lock

settings Keyless entry. See page 128 for

a description of the menu system.

USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following con-

ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)

Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation

is subject to the following conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

Disarming the alarm

Press the Unlock button on the remote key.

> Two short flashes from the car's direc-

tion indicators confirm that the alarm

has been deactivated and that all doors

are unlocked.

Turning off (stopping) the alarm

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by

pressing the Unlock button on the remote key

or by inserting the remote key in the ignition

slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction

indicators confirm that the alarm has been

turned off.

Other alarm-related functions

Automatic re-arming

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-

matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will

re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tail-

gate has been opened.

Audible/visual alarm signal

•An audible alarm signal is given by a bat-

tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts

for 30 seconds.

•The visual alarm signal is given by flashing

all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes

or until the alarm is turned off.

Remote key not functioning

If the remote key is not functioning properly,

the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can

be started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.

> This will trigger the alarm.

2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot

(also on vehicles with the optional keyless

drive). This will turn off the alarm.

Reduced alarm function

Turning off the accessory alarm sensors

In certain situations it may be desirable to turn

off the accessory inclination and movement

alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your

vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the

boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in

the vehicle with the doors locked.

The vehicle's menu system is used for turning

off these sensors (see page 128 for a descrip-

tion of the menu system).

1. Go into the menu under Car settings.

2. Select Reduced Guard (Press OK/

MENU to choose).

3. Two alternatives are now available:

•Activate once. If this alternative is

selected, Reduced guard See

manual will appear in the instrument

panel display and the accessory incli-

nation and movement alarm sensors will

be deactivated when the vehicle is

locked.

•Ask when exiting. If this alternative is

selected, a message will appear in the

center console display each time the

engine is turned off. Press OK/MENU to

accept and the accessory inclination

and movement alarm sensors will be

deactivated when the vehicle is locked.

Press EXIT to cancel.

4. Press OK/MENU and lock the vehicle.

The next time the engine is started, the alarm

system will be reset and Full guard will appear

in the instrument panel display. The accessory

inclination and movement alarm sensors will be

reactivated.

In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to

deactivate the accessory inclination and move-

ment alarm sensors, do not make a choice in

the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

02 Locks and alarm

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Instruments and controls........................................................................ 74

Ignition modes........................................................................................ 81

Seats....................................................................................................... 82

Steering wheel........................................................................................ 88

Lighting................................................................................................... 89

Wipers and washers................................................................................ 95

Power windows....................................................................................... 98

Mirrors................................................................................................... 100

Compass*.............................................................................................. 102

Laminated panoramic roof*................................................................... 103

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*................................................. 106

Starting the engine................................................................................ 109

Transmission......................................................................................... 112

Brakes................................................................................................... 115

Parking brake........................................................................................ 118

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.................................................................. 121

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75

Function Page

Menus and mes-

sages, turn signals,

high/low beams,

trip computer

128, 92,

89, 142

Cruise control 147

Horn, airbag 88, 22

Main instrument

panel

Audio system/Blue-

tooth hands-free

controls

200, 229

START/STOP

ENGINE button

Ignition slot 81

Infotainment/menu

display

Door handle –

Function Page

In-door control pan-

els (power win-

dows, mirrors,

power child safety

locks, central lock-

ing button)

98, 100,

52, 66

Hazard warning

flashers

Audio system con-

trols

200

Climate system

controls

137

Gear selector 112

Controls for active

chassis (Four-C)*

146

Wipers and washers 95, 96

Steering wheel

adjustment

Hood opening con-

trol

303

Parking brake 118

Function Page

Lighting panel, con-

trols for opening

fuel filler door/tail-

gate

89, 252,

Power seat* adjust-

ment controls

Information displays

Information displays in the instrument panel

The information displays show information on

some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise

control, the trip computer and messages. The

information is shown with text and symbols.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

More detailed information can be found in the

descriptions of the functions that use the infor-

mation displays.

Gauges

Gauges in the instrument panel

Speedometer

Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level

indicator in the gauge moves from right to

left as the amount of fuel in the tank

decreases. The arrow indicates the side of

the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on. See

also the section on refueling beginning on

page 250. See page 142 for more infor-

mation on fuel level and consumption.

The tachometer shows engine speed in

thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Do not drive continuously with the needle

in the red area of the gauge. The engine

management system will automatically

prevent excessively high engines speeds.

This will be noticeable as a pronounced

unevenness in engine speed.

Indicator, information, and warning

symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

High beam and turn signal indicators

Indicator and warning symbols

Information symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Function check

All indicator and warning symbols light up in

ignition mode II or when the engine is started.

When the engine has started, all the symbols

should go out except the parking brake sym-

bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-

engaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function

check is carried out in ignition mode II, all sym-

bols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol

for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and

the symbol for low oil pressure.

Certain symbols may not have their functions

illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equip-

ment.

Indicator and information symbols

Symbol Description

Fault in the Active Bending

Light (ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator light

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Rear fog light on

Stability system

Tire pressure monitoring sen-

sor (TPMS)

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

Symbol Description

Low fuel level

Information symbol, see text

in information display

High beam indicator

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

The stability system's Sport

mode is activated.

Fault in the Active Bending Light

(ABL) system

This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault

in the ABL system. See page 90 for more

information about this system.

Malfunction Indicator Light

As you drive, a computer called On-Board

Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's

engine, transmission, electrical and emission

systems.

The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE)

light will illuminate if the computer senses a

condition that potentially may need correcting.

When this happens, please have your vehicle

checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician as soon as possible.

A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light

may have many causes. Sometimes, you may

not notice a change in your car's behavior.

Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt

fuel economy, emission controls, and drivabil-

ity. Extended driving without correcting the

cause could even damage other components

in your vehicle.

This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is

not closed tightly or if the engine was running

while the vehicle was refueled.

Canadian models are equipped with this

symbol.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

warning light

If the warning light comes on, there may be a

malfunction in the ABS system (the standard

braking system will still function). Check the

system by:

1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off

the ignition.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the warning light goes off, no further

action is required.

If the warning light remains on, the vehicle

should be driven to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for inspection, see

page 115 for additional information.

Canadian models are equipped with this

symbol.

Rear fog light

This symbol indicates that the rear fog light

(located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is

on.

Stability system

This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC

(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys-

tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle,

see page 144 for more detailed information.

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)*

This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire

pressure in one or more tires is low, see

page 294 for detailed information.

Low fuel level

When this light comes on, the vehicle should

be refueled as soon as possible. See page

250 for information about fuel and refueling.

Information symbol

The information symbol lights up and a text

message is displayed to provide the driver with

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

necessary information about one of the vehi-

cle's systems. The message can be erased and

the symbol can be turned off by pressing the

READ button (see page 126 for information) or

this will take place automatically after a short

time (the length of time varies, depending on

the function affected).

The information symbol may also illuminate

together with other symbols.

High beam indicator

This symbol illuminates when the high beam

headlights are on, or if the high beam flash

function is used.

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

NOTE

•Both turn signal indicators will flash

when the hazard warning flashers are

used.

•If either of these indicators flash faster

than normal, the direction indicators are

not functioning properly.

Sport mode

This symbol illuminates to indicate that the sta-

bility system's Sport mode has been activated

to help provide maximum tractive force, for

example when driving with snow chains, or

driving in deep snow or loose sand.

Indicator and warning symbols

Symbol Description

Low oil pressure

Parking brake applied

SRS airbags

Seat belt reminder

Generator not charging

Fault in the brake system

Warning symbol

Low oil pressure

If the light comes on while driving, stop the

vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is nor-

mal and the light stays on after restart, have the

vehicle towed to the nearest trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician. This is normal,

provided it goes off when the engine speed is

increased.

Parking brake applied

This symbol illuminates when the parking

brake is applied. On models equipped with the

electric parking brake, this symbol flashes

while the brake is being applied and then glows

steadily.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has been

detected. See the message in the information

display.

Canadian models are equipped with this

symbol.

See page 118 for more information about

using the parking brake.

Airbags – SRS

If this light comes on while the vehicle is being

driven, or remains on for longer than approxi-

mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been

started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions

have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre-

tensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag,

and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s)

inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician as soon as possible.

See page 21 for more information about the

airbag system.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Seat belt reminder

This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec-

onds if the driver has not fastened his or her

seat belt.

Generator not charging

This symbol comes on during driving if a fault

has occurred in the electrical system. Contact

an authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine temperature

Engine overheating can result from low oil or

coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high

heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.

Engine overheating will be signaled with text

and a red warning triangle in the middle of the

instrument display. The exact text will depend

on the degree of overheating. It may range from

High engine temp Reduce speed to High

engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate,

other messages, such as Coolant level low,

Stop safely will also be displayed. If your

engine does overheat so that you must stop the

engine, always allow the engine to cool before

attempting to check oil and coolant levels.

See page 306 for more information.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may

be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and

check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

page 306. If the level in the reservoir is below

MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an

authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake

system checked.

Canadian models are equipped with this

symbol.

If the and symbols come on at the

same time, there may be a fault in the brake

force distribution system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off

the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

•If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-

ing.

•If the symbols remain on, check the level in

the brake fluid reservoir, see page 306. If

the brake fluid level is normal but the sym-

bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven,

with great care, to an authorized Volvo

workshop to have the brake system

checked.

•If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the

vehicle should be transported to an author-

ized Volvo workshop to have the brake

system checked.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a warning message

is displayed in the text window: DO

NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to

a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician and have the brake system

inspected.

•If the ABS and Brake system lights are

on at the same time, there is a risk of

reduced vehicle stability.

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a

problem related to safety and/or drivability. A

message will also appear in the main instru-

ments panel's display. The symbol remains

visible until the fault has been rectified but the

text message can be cleared with the READ

button, see page 126. The warning symbol can

also come on in conjunction with other sym-

bols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehi-

cle further.

2. Read the information on the information

display. Implement the action in accord-

ance with the message in the display. Clear

the message using READ.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors, the hood or tailgate is not

closed properly, the information or warning

symbol comes on together with an explanatory

text message in the instrument panel. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and

close the door, hood or tailgate.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

lower than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the information symbol comes on.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

higher than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on.

Trip odometers

Trip odometers and reset button

Odometer display

Button for toggling between T1 and T2,

and for resetting the odometer

The trip odometers are used to measure short

distances. A short press the button toggles

between the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A

long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an

active trip odometer to zero. The distance is

shown in the display.

Clock

Clock and setting control

Display

Control for setting the clock

Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise

to set the time. The set time is shown in the

information display.

The clock may be temporarily replaced by a

symbol in conjunction with a message, see

page 126.

03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81

Inserting and removing the remote key

Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP

ENGINE button.

Inserting the remote key

Holding the end of the remote key with the

base of the key blade, insert the remote key

into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration

and press it in as far as possible (past the

detent).

CAUTION

Foreign objects in the ignition slot can

impair function or damage the lock.

Removing the remote key

The remote key can be removed from the igni-

tion slot by pulling it out.

Ignition modes

The various ignition modes are accessed with

the remote key in the ignition slot.

Posi-

tion

Function

0Odometer, clock and tempera-

ture gauge are illuminated. Steer-

ing lock is deactivated. The audio

system can be used.

ILaminated panoramic roof,

power windows,12-volt sockets,

navigation system*, climate sys-

tem blower, ECC, windshield

wipers can be used.

II The headlights come on. Warn-

ing/indicator lights come on for

5 seconds. All equipment oper-

ates apart from heated seats and

rear window defroster, which

only work when the engine is run-

ning.

III The starter motor will operate

until the engine has started.

NOTE

The brake pedal must not be depressed

when accessing ignition modes I or II.

Ignition mode 0

Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and

press it in as far as possible.

Ignition mode I

With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot, press START/STOP

ENGINE briefly.

Ignition mode II

With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot, press START/STOP

ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.

Ignition mode III (engine start)

Start the engine, see page 109.

Stopping the engine

Press START/STOP ENGINE. (If the

engine is running and the vehicle is mov-

ing, keep the button depressed until the

engine stops).

Returning to ignition mode 0

Press START/STOP ENGINE briefly to

return to ignition mode 0 from modes I or

II.

Emergency towing

Ignition mode II should be used so that the

lighting can be switched on.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front seats

Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer

or softer lumbar support.

Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and

move the seat to the position of your

choice.

Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,

pump up/down.

Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the

angle of the backrest.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

•Do not adjust the seat while driving. The

seat should be adjusted so that the

brake pedal can be depressed fully. In

addition, position the seat as far rear-

ward as comfort and control allow.

•Check that the seat is securely locked

into position after adjusting.

Folding the front seat backrest

The front passenger seat backrest can be

folded to a horizontal position to make room for

a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

Move the seat as far back and down as

possible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.

Without releasing the catches, push the

backrest forward.

Move the seat as far forward as possible

so that the head restraint slides under the

glove compartment.

WARNING

•When transporting long objects, cover

sharp edges on the load to help prevent

injury to occupants. Secure the load to

help prevent shifting during sudden

stops.

•When the seat's backrest is returned to

the upright position, push and pull it to

be sure that it is securely locked in this

position.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

Power seat*

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/rearward and up/down

Backrest tilt

Operation

The seats can be adjusted for a short period

after unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol without the key in the ignition slot. Seat

adjustment is normally made when the ignition

is on and can always be made when the engine

is running.

NOTE

•Only one of the power seat's controls

can be used at the same time.

•The power seats have an overload pro-

tector that activates if a seat is blocked

by any object. If this occurs, switch off

the ignition (key in position 0) and wait

for a short period before operating the

seat again.

Seat with memory function

Stored seat position

Memory button

Programming the memory

Three different seating and door mirror posi-

tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.

The following example explains how button (1)

can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are

programmed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat position and door

mirror position in button (1):

1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the

desired position using the seat and mirror

adjustment controls.

2. Press and hold down the memory button

(4).

3. With the memory button depressed, press

button (1) briefly to store the current posi-

tion for the seat/mirrors.

To move the seat and mirrors to the position

that they were in when a button was pro-

grammed:

Press and hold down button (1) until the

seat and mirrors stop moving.

NOTE

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop

automatically if the button is released before

the seat has reached the preset position.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote keyless entry system and the

driver's seat and door mirrors

The remote control transmitter also controls

the position of the power driver's seat and door

mirrors in the following way:

1. Adjust the seat to your preferences.

2. When you leave your vehicle, lock it using

the remote control.

The position of the driver's seat and door mir-

rors is now stored in the remote control's mem-

ory.

Automatic seat/mirror adjustment

To move the seat and door mirrors to the posi-

tion in which you left them:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the same

remote control (the one used to lock the

doors).

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto-

matically move to the position in which you left

them.

NOTE

•The key memory is independent of the

seat memory.

•The seat will move to this position even

if someone else has moved it to a dif-

ferent seating position and locked the

vehicle with a different remote control.

•This feature will work in the same way

with all of the remote control transmit-

ters that you use with your vehicle.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under MY CAR under Settings Car

settings Car key memory Position of

door mirrors and driver's seat in key. See

page 128 for a description of the menu sys-

tem.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, press

one of the buttons to stop the seat.

WARNING

•Because the driver's seat can be

adjusted with the ignition off, children

should never be left unattended in the

vehicle.

•Movement of the seat can be STOPPED

at any time by pressing any button on

the power seat control panel.

•Do not adjust the seat while driving. The

seat should be adjusted so that the

brake pedal can be depressed fully. In

addition, position the seat as far rear-

ward as comfort and control allow.

•The seat rails on the floor must not be

obstructed in any way when the seat is

in motion.

Heated seats*

See page 138.

1See page 64 for information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

Rear seats

Rear center head restraint

The center head restraint should be adjusted

according to the passenger's height. The

restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup-

port the occupant's head.

•Pull the head restraint up as required.

•To lower, press and hold the button

(located at the center, between the back-

rest and the head restraint) while pressing

the head restrain down.

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint should

only be in its lowest position when this seat

is NOT occupied. When the center position

is occupied, the head restraint should be

correctly adjusted to the passenger’s

height. The upper edge of the head restraint

should be at least on a level with the upper-

most point of the seat occupant's ear.

Manually folding down the rear seat's

outboard head restraints

•Pull the handle closest to the head restraint

to fold it down.

•To return the head restraint to the upright

position, push it up until it clicks into place.

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot be

folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be kept

folded down for prolonged periods. This

could result in pressure marks in leather

upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be

allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi-

tions if the head restraints are folded down.

If these positions are occupied, the head

restraints should be in the upright (fixed)

position.

Automatically folding down the rear

seat’s outboard head restraints*

1. The ignition must be in mode I or II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear head

restraints for improved visibility.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be kept

folded down for prolonged periods. This

could result in pressure marks in leather

upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be

allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi-

tions if the head restraints are folded down.

If these positions are occupied, the head

restraints should be in the upright (fixed)

position.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The three sections of the rear seat backrest can

be folded down in different combinations to

make it easier to transport long objects.

•The left (driver's side) section can be folded

down separately.

•The center section can be folded down

separately.

•The right (passenger's side) section can

only be folded down together with the cen-

ter section.

•All three sections can be folded down

together.

CAUTION

To help avoid damage to the upholstery,

there should be no objects on the rear seat

and the seat belt should not be buckled

when the backrest is folded down.

G017903

03 Your driving environment

Seats

Release and lower the center head

restraint (see page 85) if the center and/or

right section of the backrest is to be low-

ered. The outboard head restraints fold

down automatically.

Pull up the backrest release control on the

respective section(s) and fold the sec-

tion(s) down.

NOTE

It may be necessary to move the front seats

forward or put their backrests in a more

upright position before folding down the

rear seat backrests.

WARNING

•When one or more sections of the back-

rest is returned to the upright position,

check that it is properly locked in place

by pushing and pulling it. The red indi-

cators should also not be visible.

•Return the outboard head restraints to

the upright position.

•Long loads should always be securely

anchored to help avoid injury in the

event of a sudden stop.

•Always turn the engine off and apply the

parking brake when loading/unloading

the vehicle.

•Place the transmission in the Park (P)

position to help prevent inadvertent

movement of the gear selector.

•On hot days, the temperature in the

vehicle interior can rise very quickly.

Exposure of people to these high tem-

peratures for even a short period of time

can cause heat-related injury or death.

Small children are particularly at risk.

03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adjusting

G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel

Lever for releasing/locking the steering

wheel

Possible positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both

height and reach:

1. Pull the lever toward you to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position

that suits you.

3. Push back the lever to lock the steering

wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to

push into place, press the steering wheel

lightly at the same time as you push the

lever.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-

ing.

With the optional speed-dependent power

steering the level of steering force can be

adjusted, see page 146.

Keypads

Keypads in the steering wheel

Cruise control, see page 147. Adaptive

cruise control*, see page 149.

Infotainment controls, see page 203.

Horn

Press the steering wheel hub to sound the

horn.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Lighting panel

Overview, light switches

Thumb wheel for adjusting display and

instrument lighting

Rear fog light

Headlights/parking lights

Instrument lighting

Illumination of the display and instrument lights

will vary, depending on ignition mode.

The display lighting is automatically subdued

in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the

thumb wheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is

adjusted with the thumb wheel.

High/low beam headlights

Headlight switch and lever

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Daytime running lights/no high

beams

Parking lights

Low beams

High beam flash

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to

position 1. The high beams come on until the

lever is released.

High/low beam headlights

Continuous high beams

1. Set the ignition to mode II.

2. With the light switch in position , pull

the turn signal lever toward the steering

wheel to position 2 to toggle between high

and low beams (this also applies on mod-

els equipped with the optional Active

Bending Lights).

>The symbol illuminates in the

instrument panel to indicate that the

high beams are on.

Low beams

When the engine is started, the low beams are

activated automatically (daytime running lights)

if the headlight control is in position 0 or

Daytime running lights can be deactivated by

a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

•The use of daytime running lights is

mandatory in Canada.

•Continuous high beams cannot be acti-

vated when the headlight switch is in

position or 0. High beam flash will

function in these positions.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light

function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

When this function is activated, the headlight

beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve

according to movements of the steering wheel

(see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).

ABL is activated automatically1 when the

engine is started and it can be deactivated/

reactivated in the menu system under

MY CAR Settings Car settings Light

settings Active bending lights.

NOTE

This function is only active in twilight or dark

conditions, and only when the vehicle is in

motion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol

will illuminate and a message will be displayed

as shown in the table.

Symbol Display Explana-

tion

Headlamp

failure

Service

required

The system

is not func-

tioning

properly and

should be

inspected/

repaired by

a trained

and qualified

Volvo serv-

ice techni-

cian.

1The factory default setting is on.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Parking lights

Headlight control in position for parking lights

The rear parking lights can be turned on even

when the ignition is switched off.

Turn the headlight control to the center posi-

tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the

same time).

The lighting also comes on when the tailgate is

opened in order to alert anyone traveling

behind your vehicle.

Rear fog light

The single rear fog light is located in the driver's

side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only

function in combination with the high/low

beam headlights.

Press the button to switch the rear fog light

on/off.

> The rear fog light indicator symbol

on the instrument panel and the

light in the button come on when the

rear fog light is switched on.

NOTE

The rear fog light is considerably brighter

than the normal taillights and should be

used only when conditions such as fog, rain,

snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for

other vehicles to less than 500 ft.

(150 meters).

Hazard warning flashers

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

The hazard warning flasher should be used to

indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic

hazard.

To activate the flashers, press the button

in the center dash. Press the button again

to turn off the flashers.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

NOTE

•Regulations regarding the use of the

hazard warning flasher may vary,

depending on where you live.

•The hazard warning flashers will be acti-

vated automatically if an airbag

deploys.

Turn signals

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn

signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever

up or down to the first position and releasing it.

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as possi-

ble to start the turn signals. The turn signals will

be cancelled automatically by the movement of

the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned

to its initial position by hand.

NOTE

•This automatic flashing sequence can

be interrupted by immediately moving

the lever in the opposite direction.

•If the turn signal indicator flashes faster

than normal, check for a burned-out

turn signal bulb.

Interior lighting, front

G021149

Light switches, front roof lighting

Drivers side front reading light, on/off

Passenger's side front reading light, on/off

Overhead courtesy lighting.

The lighting in the front part of the passenger

compartment is controlled with the buttons (1)

and (2) in the roof console.

Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger

compartment lighting:

•Off: right side depressed, automatic light-

ing off.

•Neutral position: automatic lighting is on.

•On – left side depressed, passenger com-

partment lighting on.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

Interior lighting, rear

Rear reading lights

The lights are switched on or off by pressing

each respective button.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*

The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch

on/off automatically when one of the front

doors is opened/closed.

Glove compartment lighting

The glove compartment lighting switches on/

off automatically when the lid is opened/

closed.

Overhead courtesy lighting

The passenger compartment lighting is

switched on and off automatically when button

(3) is in the neutral position.

The lighting comes on and remains on for

30 seconds if:

•the vehicle is unlocked from the outside

with the key or remote control

•the engine is switched off and the ignition

is in mode 0.

The lighting switches off when:

•the engine is started

•the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting comes on and remains on for two

minutes if one of the doors is open.

The passenger compartment lighting can be

switched on and off manually within 30 minutes

after the vehicle has been unlocked.

If the lighting is switched on manually and the

vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will

switch off automatically after one minute.

Cargo area lighting

The cargo area lighting comes on automatically

when the tailgate is opened.

Home safe lighting

When you leave your vehicle at night, you can

make use of the home safe lighting function to

illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.

1. Remove the key from the ignition slot.

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible

towards the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

The headlights, parking lights, turn signals,

lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights,

and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain

on for 30 2, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval

can be set in MY CAR under Settings Car

settings Light settings Home safe light

duration. See page 128 for a description of

the menu system.

Approach lighting

Approach lighting is activated by pressing the

approach light button on the remote key (see

the illustration on page 58).

When the function has been activated, the

parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror

lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and

door step lighting come on.

2Factory setting

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

The time interval for this lighting can be set by

pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings

Light settings Approach light

duration. See page 128 for a description of

the menu system.

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95

Windshield wipers/washers

Windshield wipers and washers

Rain sensor* on/off

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield. The windshield should

be thoroughly wet when the wipers are

in operation.

•Before using the wipers, ice and snow

should be removed from the wind-

shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper

blades are not frozen in place.

Windshield wipers off

Move the lever to position 0 to switch

off the windshield wipers.

Single sweep

Move the lever upward from position

0 to sweep the windshield one stroke

at a time for as long as the lever is held up.

Intermittent wiping

With the lever in this position, you can

set the wiper interval by twisting the

thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed

or downward to decrease the speed.

Continuous wiping

The wipers operate at normal speed.

The wipers operate at high speed.

Windshield wiper service position

The windshield wipers must be in the service

position before the wiper blades can be

cleaned or replaced. See page 315 for addi-

tional information.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper

speed according to the amount of water on the

windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor

can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up

(the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre-

quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the

windshield less frequently).

NOTE

The wipers will make an extra sweep each

time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol

will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle

must be running or in ignition mode II and the

windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or

in the single sweep position.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button

. The windshield wipers will make one

sweep.

Press the lever up for the wipers to make an

extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active

mode when the stalk is released back to posi-

tion 0.

Deactivating

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-

ton or press the lever down to another

wiper position.

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the key is removed from the ignition slot

or five minutes after the ignition has been

switched off.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated when

washing the car in an automatic car wash,

etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the

wipers will start inadvertently in the car

wash and could be damaged.

Windshield washing

Washing function

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to

start the windshield and headlight washers.

After the lever is released the wipers make sev-

eral extra sweeps.

Heated washer nozzles*

The washer nozzles are heated automatically

in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*

High-pressure headlight washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the

headlights are washed using two alternatives:

•Low/high beam headlights on. The head-

lights will be washed the first time the wind-

shield is washed. Thereafter, the head-

lights will only be washed once for every

five times the windshield is washed within

a 10-minute period.

•Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-

ing Lights will be washed once for every

five times the windshield is washed. Nor-

mal halogen headlights will not be washed.

CAUTION

Use ample washer fluid when washing the

windshield. The windshield should be thor-

oughly wet when the wipers are in opera-

tion.

Tailgate wiper/washer

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer.

Intermittent wiping

Normal (continuous) wiping

NOTE

The rear wiper is equipped with cut-off func-

tion, which means that it will not operate if

its electric motor overheats. The wiper will

function again after a cool-down period

(30 seconds or longer, depending on the

heat of the motor and ambient temperature

conditions).

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

If the windshield wipers are on and the trans-

mission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate

wiper will go into intermittent wiping function1.

This function is deactivated when a different

gear is selected.

NOTE

On vehicles with the optional rain sensor,

the tailgate wiper will be activated when

reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is acti-

vated and it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous)

wiping mode, selecting different gears will not

affect its function.

IR-reflecting windshield*

Section of the windshield where the IR-coating is

not applied

Dimensions

A 1.9 in. (47 mm)

B 3.4 in. (87 mm)

An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coa-

ting can be applied to the windshield to help

protect the cabin from the sun's heat and the

fading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels,

etc.

Electronic equipment such as garage door

openers, electronic toll tags and similar devi-

ces should not be placed on sections of the

windshield with the IR coating because this

could affect their function and limit their range.

For best performance, place the device on the

section of the windshield without the IR coating

(see the area marked in the illustration).

1Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

03 Your driving environment

Power windows

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Power windows

Driver's door control panel

Switch for power child safety locks* and

disengaging rear power window buttons,

see page 52

Rear window controls

Front window controls.

WARNING

•Always remove the ignition key when

the vehicle is unattended.

•Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

•Make sure that the windows are com-

pletely unobstructed before they are

operated.

Operating

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down

Auto up/down.

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel in the driver's door. The control

panels in the other doors only operate the win-

dow in the respective doors.

For the power windows to function, the ignition

must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle

has been running, the power windows can be

operated for several minutes after the remote

key has been removed from the ignition slot, or

until a door has been opened.

NOTE

•Movement of the windows will stop if

they are obstructed in any way.

•To reduce buffeting wind noise if the

rear windows are opened, also open the

front windows slightly.

Manual up/down

Move one of the controls up/down slightly.

> The power windows move up/down as

long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down

Move one of the controls up/down as far

as possible and release it.

> The window will open or close com-

pletely.

Resetting

If the battery has been disconnected, the auto

open function must be reset so that it will work

properly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button

to close the window and hold it for one

second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again

for one second.

03 Your driving environment

Power windows

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99

Laminated glass*

This glass is reinforced to help pro-

vide protection against break-ins and

improved sound insulation in the

passenger compartment.

The windshield, laminated panoramic roof and

other windows have laminated glass.

03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Power door mirrors

Door mirror controls

Adjusting

1. Press the L button for the left door mirror

or the R button for the right door mirror.

The light in the button comes on.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

center.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

should no longer be on.

WARNING

Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur-

ther away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving

in narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at the

same time.

2. Release them after approximately one sec-

ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the

fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L

and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors

automatically stop in the fully extended posi-

tion.

Storing the position*

The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-

ory when the vehicle has been locked with the

remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with

the same remote control the mirrors and the

driver's seat adopt the stored positions when

the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Car key memory Position of door mirrors

and driver's seat in key. See page 128 for a

description of the menu system.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking*

The door mirrors can be tilted down to help

give the driver a better view along the sides of

the vehicle, for example when parallel parking.

To activate this function, select reverse gear

and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt

the mirror down.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt

right mirror. See page 128 for a description

of the menu system.

The door mirror will reset to its normal position:

•after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-

gaged and the car remains stopped.

•immediately when reverse is disengaged

and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

•immediately if you press the correspond-

ing L or R button again.

•when the engine is turned off.

•when the side mirrors are folded in.

NOTE

Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.

Automatically tilting the door mirrors

when parking

The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to

help give the driver a better view along the

sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel

parking. When the transmission is no longer in

03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

101

reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to

their original position.

This function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt

left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right

mirror. See page 128 for information about

the MY CAR menu system.

Automatic retraction when locking

When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the

remote key the door mirrors are automatically

retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings Retract door mirrors

when locking. See page 128 for a description

of the menu system.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of position

by an external force must be electrically reset

to the neutral position for electric retracting/

extending to work.

•Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-

tons.

•Fold them out again with the L and R but-

tons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Home safe and approach lighting

The light on the door mirrors comes on when

approach lighting or home safe lighting is

selected, see page 93.

Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice

from the rear window and the door mirrors.

Press the button once to start simultaneous

rear window and door mirror defrosting. The

light in the button indicates that the function is

active. Switch the function off when then win-

dows have cleared to help avoid battery drain.

The rear window is defogged/de-iced auto-

matically if the vehicle is started in an outside

temperature lower than 48 °F (9 °C). Auto-

defrosting can be selected in MY CAR under

Settings Climate settings Automatic

rear defroster. See page 128 for a description

of the menu system.

Interior rearview mirror

Auto-dim function

An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from

following traffic and automatically reduces

glare in the mirror.

03 Your driving environment

Compass*

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

The rearview mirror has an integrated display

that shows the compass direction in which the

vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are

shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE

(north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south),

SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest).

The compass is displayed automatically when

the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To

switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar

object and press in the button on the underside

of the mirror.

Calibration

The compass may need to be calibrated if, for

example, the vehicle is driven into a new mag-

netic zone. The character C is shown in the

mirror's display if calibration is necessary.

1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely

out of traffic and away from steel structures

and high-tension electrical wires.

2. Start the vehicle.

NOTE

For best results from calibration, switch off

all electrical equipment in the vehicle (cli-

mate system, windshield wipers, audio sys-

tem, etc.) and make sure that all doors are

closed.

3. Using a pen or similar object, press and

hold the button on the underside of mirror

until C is shown again in the mirror(after

approx. 6 seconds).

4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the dis-

play when calibration is complete.

Alternative calibration method:

Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disap-

pears from the display when calibration is

complete.

Selecting a magnetic zone

G018632

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The correct zone must be selected for the com-

pass to work correctly.

1. Put the ignition in mode II.

2. Using a pen or similar object, press and

hold the button on the rear side of mirror

for at least 3 seconds. The number for the

current area will be shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-

ber for the required geographic area

(1 – 15) is shown.

4. The display will revert to showing the com-

pass direction after several seconds.

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103

Introduction

The laminated panoramic roof is divided into

two sections.

•The rear glass section is fixed in place and

cannot be moved.

•The front glass section can be slid hori-

zontally to the open or closed positions or

its rear edge can be raised and lowered to

allow ventilation.

All references in this section to opening or clos-

ing the panoramic roof pertain to the front glass

section.

The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun

shade made of perforated fabric that is located

below the sections of glass. This shade can be

opened or closed, for example when driving in

bright sunlight.

Both the laminated panoramic roof and the sun

shade are operated by the controls in the ceil-

ing console, near the rear-view mirror. The

vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II before

the laminated panoramic roof/sun shade can

be operated.

CAUTION

•Remove ice and snow before opening

the laminated panoramic roof.

•Do not operate the laminated panor-

amic roof if it is frozen closed.

•Never place heavy objects on the lami-

nated panoramic roof.

Operation

Auto open (arrow points toward the rear of

the vehicle)

Manual open

Manual close

Auto close

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•During manual closing, if the laminated

panoramic roof is obstructed, immedi-

ately open it again.

•Never open or close the laminated pan-

oramic roof if it is obstructed in any way.

•Never allow a child to operate thelami-

nated panoramic roof.

•Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

•Never extend any object or body part

though the open laminated panoramic

roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is

completely switched off.

Automatic operation

1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the

control as far back as possible (to the auto

open position) and release it.

2. To fully open the laminated panoramic

roof, pull the control as far back as possible

a second time (to the auto open position)

and release it.

Quick open/close

The laminated panoramic roof and the sun

shade can be opened/closed at the same time:

•Open - pull the control back (to the auto

open position) twice in quick succession

and release it.

•Close - push the control forward (to the

auto close position) twice in quick succes-

sion and release it.

Manual operation

1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control

back to the first stop (the manual open

position) and hold it until the sun shade has

opened to the position of your choice.

2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated

panoramic roof: Pull the control back to

the first stop (the manual open position) a

second time to open the rear edge of the

laminated panoramic roof.

3. Opening the front glass section: Pull the

control back to the first stop (the manual

open position) a third time and hold it until

the laminated panoramic roof has opened

to the position of your choice.

Perform this procedure in reverse order to

close the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun

shade.

NOTE

For manual opening, the sun shade must

first be fully open before it will be possible

to open the laminated panoramic roof.

When closing, the laminated panoramic roof

must be fully closed before the sun shade

can be closed.

Tilt position

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass

section) by pressing the rear edge of the

control upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-

trol downward and holding it until the lami-

nated panoramic roof has closed com-

pletely.

If the sun shade is completely closed, it will

open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt

position.

Wind blocker

The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker

that folds up when the moonroof is open.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro-

vides a convenient way to replace up to three

hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters

used to activate devices such as gate opera-

tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,

security systems, even home lighting. Addi-

tional HomeLink information can be found on

the Internet at www.homelink.com.

WARNING

•If you use HomeLink to open a garage

door or gate, be sure no one is near the

gate or door while it is in motion.

•When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park outside of

the garage.

•Do not use HomeLink with any garage

door opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by U.S.

federal safety standards (this includes

any garage door opener model manu-

factured before April 1, 1982). A garage

door that cannot detect an object - sig-

naling the door to stop and reverse -

does not meet current U.S. federal

safety standards. For more information,

contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF device

you are programming for use in other vehicles

as well as for future HomeLink programming. It

is also suggested that upon the sale of the

vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be

erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing

HomeLink Buttons”.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignition

switch to be turned on or to the second

(“accessories”) position for programming

and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec-

ommended that a new battery be placed in

the hand-held transmitter of the device

being programmed to HomeLink for quicker

training and accurate transmission of the

radio-frequency signal.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-

mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the

HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the indicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both the

chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-

ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator

light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-

ing light. Now you may release both the

HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-

tons.

1HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace

this Programming Step 2 with procedures

noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-

gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica-

tor light does not change to a rapidly blink-

ing light after performing these steps, con-

tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-

ton up to two separate times to activate the

door. If the door does not activate, press

and hold the just-trained HomeLink button

and observe the indicator light.

•If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate when

the HomeLink button is pressed and

released.

•If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a con-

stant light continue with “Program-

ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro-

gramming of a rolling code equipped

device (most commonly a garage door

opener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-

head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”

or “smart” button. This can usually be

found where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button. (The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.) There

are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold

for two seconds and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence a second

time, and, depending on the brand of the

garage door opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequence a

third time to complete the programming

process.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling

code equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-

mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-

eral seconds of transmission – which may not

be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the

signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-

ties programming a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Programming” pro-

cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”

step 2 with the following:

•Continue to press and hold the HomeLink

button while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-

tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly

blinking light. Now you may release both

the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter

buttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-

plete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Activation will

now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage

door opener, gate operator, security system,

entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For

convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the

device may also be used at any time. In the

event that there are still programming difficul-

ties or questions, contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three Home-

Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined

below), follow the step noted:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash-after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for

longer that 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode

and can be programmed at any time beginning

with “Programming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink

Button

To program a device to HomeLink using a

HomeLink button previously trained, follow

these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-

ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-

Link button, proceed with “Programming”

- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15

and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) This device must accept any

interference that may be received including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the

device.2

2The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

Start

Ignition switch with remote key inserted ( see

page 81 for more information on ignition modes)

WARNING

Before starting the engine:

•Fasten the seat belt.

•Check that the seat, steering wheel and

mirrors are adjusted properly.

•Make sure the brake pedal can be

depressed completely. Adjust the seat

if necessary.

1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot

as far as possible, with the metallic key

blade pointing outward (not inserted into

the slot)1.

2. Depress the brake pedal2.

3. Press and release the START/STOP

ENGINE button. The autostart function will

operate the starter motor until the engine

starts.

The starter motor operates for a maximum

of 10 seconds. If the engine has not

started, repeat the procedure.

NOTE

Keyless drive*

To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless

drive feature, one of the remote keys must

be in the passenger compartment. Follow

the instructions in step 3 to start the vehicle.

WARNING

An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause

the accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch.

Check that the movement of these pedals is

not impeded. Not more than one protective

floor covering may be used at one time.

WARNING

•Always remove the remote key from the

ignition slot when leaving the vehicle,

especially if there are children in the

vehicle.

•Never remove the remote key from the

ignition slot while driving or when the

vehicle is being towed. The steering

lock could otherwise be activated, mak-

ing it impossible to steer the vehicle. On

vehicles with the optional keyless drive,

never remove the remote key from the

vehicle while driving or during towing.

•Always place the gear selector in Park

and apply the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle. Never leave the

vehicle unattended with the engine run-

ning.

•Always open garage doors fully before

starting the engine inside a garage to

ensure adequate ventilation. The

exhaust gases contain carbon monox-

ide, which is invisible and odorless but

very poisonous.

1On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.

2If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

110

NOTE

•After a cold start, idle speed may be

noticeably higher than normal for a

short period. This is done to help bring

components in the emission control

system to their normal operating tem-

perature as quickly as possible, which

enables them to control emissions and

help reduce the vehicle's impact on the

environment3.

CAUTION

•When starting in cold weather, the auto-

matic transmission may shift up at

slightly higher engine speeds than nor-

mal until the automatic transmission

fluid reaches normal operating tem-

perature.

•Do not race a cold engine immediately

after starting. Oil flow may not reach

some lubrication points fast enough to

prevent engine damage.

•The engine should be idling when you

move the gear selector. Never acceler-

ate until after you feel the transmission

engage. Accelerating immediately after

selecting a gear will cause harsh

engagement and premature transmis-

sion wear.

•Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-

still for prolonged periods of time will

help prevent overheating of the auto-

matic transmission fluid.

Switching off the engine

With the engine running, press the START/

STOP ENGINE button.

If the gear selector is not in the P position or if

the vehicle is moving, press the button twice or

press and hold it in until the engine switches

off.

Jump starting

G021347

Connecting the jumper cables

Follow these instructions to jump start your

vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another

vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the

12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another

vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch-

ing to prevent premature completion of a cir-

3If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

111

cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-

tions provided for the other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to

mode 0, see page 81).

2. First connect the red jumper cable to the

auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)

terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),

marked with a "+" sign, located under a

folding cover.

4. Connect the black jumper cable to the aux-

iliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and

to the ground point in your vehicle's engine

compartment (right engine mount at the

top, on the outer screw) (4).

5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,

then start the engine in the vehicle with

dead battery.

6. After the engine has started, first remove

the negative (–) terminal jumper cable

(black). Then remove the positive (+) termi-

nal jumper cable (red).

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Connect the jumper cables carefully to

avoid short circuits with other components

in the engine compartment.

WARNING

•Do not connect the jumper cable to any

part of the fuel system or to any moving

parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

•Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which

is flammable and explosive.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-

tact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medical

help immediately if eyes are affected.

•Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Failure to follow the instructions for

jump starting can lead to injury.

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

112

Automatic transmission

G021351

Shiftgate positions1

Depress the button on the front of the gear

selector knob to move the gear selector

between the R, N, D, and P positions.

The gear selector can be moved freely between

the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)

positions while driving.

Park position (P)

Select the P position when starting or parking.

Shiftlock

When P has been selected, the transmission is

mechanically blocked in this position. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the igni-

tion must be in at least mode II (see page 81)

before the gear lever can be moved from the

P position.

Always apply the parking brake when the vehi-

cle is parked. Press the control to apply the

brake, see page 118.

CAUTION

The vehicle must be stationary when posi-

tion P is selected.

Reverse ®)

The vehicle must be stationary when position

R is selected.

Neutral position (N)

No gear is engaged and the engine can be

started with the gear selector in this position.

Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-

tionary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive (D)

D is the normal driving position. The car auto-

matically shifts between the various forward

gears, based on the level of acceleration and

speed. The car must be at a standstill when

shifting from position R to position D.

Geartronic–manual shifting

Geartronic allows you to manually shift among

your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic

can be selected at any time.

•To access the manual shifting position

from Drive (D), move the gear selector to

the right (to the area marked M in the illus-

tration.

•To return to the D position from the manual

shifting position, move the gear selector to

the left.

While driving

•If you select the manual shifting position

while driving, the gear that was being used

in the Drive position will also initially be

selected in the manual shifting position.

•Move the gear selector forward (toward

"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward

(toward "–") to shift to a lower gear.

1The information display (see page 75) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

113

•If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the

transmission will downshift one gear at a

time and will utilize the braking power of

the engine. If the current speed is too high

for using a lower gear, the downshift will

not occur until the speed has decreased

enough to allow the lower gear to be used.

•If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-

mission will automatically shift down.

Shiftlock – Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in the N position and the

vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 sec-

onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run-

ning) then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N to

another gear position, the brake pedal must be

depressed and the ignition must be in posi-

tion II, see page 81.

Geartronic–Sport mode (S)

This transmission mode provides sportier shift-

ing characteristics and enables a more active

driving style by making it possible to drive at

higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The

engine also responds faster when the throttle

pedal is pressed.

To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the

gear selector to the right. The transmission will

not switch to manual shifting mode until the

gear selector is moved forward or rearward

toward + or -.

Sport mode can be selected any time.

NOTE

•When the transmission is in Sport

mode, the transmission symbol in the

main instrument panel will change from

D to S (see page 75).

•Please be aware that using Sport mode

may result in a slight decrease in fuel

economy. Driving in D can help improve

fuel economy.

Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces

Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shift-

ing mode can help provide better traction when

starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the

gear selector to the right from the D posi-

tion to the manual shifting position. The

text in the instrument panel display will

change from D to 1.

2. Press the gear selector forward and

release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the

selector forward again and release it to

select 3rd gear.

3. Release the brake pedal and press gently

on the accelerator pedal.

Shiftlock override

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example

because of a dead battery, the gear selector

must be moved from the P position before the

vehicle can be moved3.

Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the

storage compartment behind the center

console to expose the small opening for

overriding the shiftlock system.

2Only available on models with the T6 turbo engine.

3If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 110.

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

114

Insert the key blade into the opening. Press

the key blade down as far as possible and

keep it held down. Move the gear selector

from the P position. For information on the

key blade, see page 60.

All Wheel Drive – AWD

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent

All Wheel Drive, which means that power is

distributed automatically between the front

and rear wheels. Under normal driving condi-

tions, most of the engine's power is directed to

the front wheels. However, if there is any ten-

dency for the front wheels to spin, an electron-

ically controlled coupling distributes power to

the wheels that have the best traction.

NOTE

The message AWD disabled Service

required will be appear in the information

display if an electrical fault should occur in

the AWD system. A warning light will also

illuminate in the instrument panel. If this

occurs, have the system checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

4Standard on certain models.

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

Brake system

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-

sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob-

lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is

still possible to stop the vehicle with the other

brake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed farther

than normal and requires greater foot pressure,

the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will light

up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,

stop immediately and check the brake fluid

level in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintain

pressure on the pedal – do not pump the

brakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the

reservoir or if a brake system message is

shown in the information display: DO NOT

DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician and

have the brake system inspected.

Brake pad inspection mirror

This mirror is used to inspect the brake pads

on vehicles that are not equipped with the a

jack* and lug wrench*.

This mirror is located with the other tools under

the floor of the cargo compartment (see

page 291).

Insert the mirror between the spokes in the

wheels to visually inspect the brake pads for

wear.

Brake lights

The brake lights come on automatically when

the brakes are applied.

Adaptive brake lights

The adaptive brake lights activate in the event

of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti-

vated. This function causes an additional tail-

light on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to

help alert vehicles traveling behind.

The adaptive brake lights activate if:

•The ABS system activates for more than

approximately a half second

•In the event of sudden braking while the

vehicle is moving at speeds above approx-

imately 6 mph (10 km/h)

When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake

lights and additional taillights remain on for as

long as the brake pedal is depressed or until

braking force on the vehicle is reduced.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure

which is only created when the engine is run-

ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the

engine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consider-

ably higher pressure will be required on the

brake pedal to compensate for the lack of

power assistance. This can happen for exam-

ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is

switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The

brake pedal feels harder than usual.

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

116

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through an

automatic car wash can cause water to collect

on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a

delay in braking effect when the pedal is

depressed. To avoid such a delay when the

brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa-

sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc.

This will remove the water from the brakes.

Check that brake application feels normal. This

should also be done after washing or starting

in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strain

when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or

when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually

slower, which means that the cooling of the

brakes is less efficient than when driving on

level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,

shift into a lower gear and let the engine help

with the braking. Do not forget that if you are

towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to

a greater than normal load.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to

improve vehicle control (stopping and steering)

during severe braking conditions by limiting

brake lockup. When the system "senses"

impending lockup, braking pressure is auto-

matically modulated in order to help prevent

lockup that could lead to a skid.

The system performs a brief self-diagnostic

test when the engine has been started and

driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-

matic test may be performed when the vehicle

first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several

times and a sound may be audible from the

ABS control module, which is normal.

Cleaning the brake discs

Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs

may result in delayed brake function. This delay

is minimized by cleaning the brake linings.

Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet

weather, prior to long-term parking, and after

the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brak-

ing gently for a short period while the vehicle is

moving.

Emergency Brake Assistance

EBA is designed to provide full brake effect

immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-

ing. The system is activated by the speed with

which the brake pedal is depressed.

When the EBA system is activated, the brake

pedal will go down and pressure in the brake

system immediately increases to the maximum

level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal

in order to utilize the system completely. EBA

is automatically deactivated when the brake

pedal is released.

NOTE

•When the EBA system is activated, the

brake pedal will go down and pressure

in the brake system immediately increa-

ses to the maximum level. You must

maintain full pressure on the brake

pedal in order to utilize the system com-

pletely. There will be no braking effect if

the pedal is released. EBA is automati-

cally deactivated when the brake pedal

is released.

•When the vehicle has been parked for

some time, the brake pedal may sink

more than usual when the engine is

started. This is normal and the pedal will

return to its usual position when it is

released.

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

117

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Specification

Steady glow – Check the brake

fluid level. If the level is low, fill

with brake fluid and check for

the cause of the brake fluid

loss.

Steady glow for two seconds

when the engine is started –

There was a fault in the brake

system's ABS function when

the engine was last running.

WARNING

If and come on at the same time

and the brake level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a brake system-related

message is shown in the information dis-

play: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician and have the brake system

inspected.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

118

Electric parking brake

An electric parking brake has the same func-

tion as a manual parking brake.

NOTE

•A faint sound from the parking brake's

electric motor can be heard when the

parking brake is being applied. This

sound can also be heard during the

automatic function check of the parking

brake.

•The brake pedal will move slightly when

the electric parking brake is applied or

released.

Low battery voltage

If the battery voltage is too low, the parking

brake cannot be applied or released. Connect

an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too

low, see page 110.

Applying the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

2. Push the control.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that

the vehicle is at a standstill.

4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selec-

tor must be in position P.

The symbol in the instrument panel

flashes while the parking bake is being applied,

and glows steadily when the parking brake has

been fully applied.

NOTE

•In an emergency the parking brake can

be applied when the vehicle is moving

by holding in the control. Braking will be

interrupted when the accelerator pedal

is depressed or the control is released.

•An audible signal will sound during this

procedure if the vehicle is moving at

speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Parking on a hill

•If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front

wheels so that they point away from the

curb.

•If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the

front wheels so that they point toward the

curb.

The parking brake should also be applied.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119

Releasing the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

Manual release

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot.

3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

4. Pull the parking brake control.

Vehicles with Keyless drive*

1. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button.

2. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

3. Pull the parking brake control.

Automatic release

1. Start the engine.

NOTE

•For safety reasons, the parking brake is

only released automatically if the engine

is running and the driver is wearing a seat

belt.

•The electric parking brake will be

released immediately when the acceler-

ator pedal is pressed and the gear selec-

tor is in position D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R

and press the accelerator pedal. The park-

ing brake will release when the vehicle

begins to move.

Heavy load uphill

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the

vehicle to roll backward when the parking

brake is released automatically on a steep

incline. To help avoid this:

1. Keep the electric parking brake lever

pushed in with the left hand while shifting

into Drive with the right.

2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull

away, release the parking brake lever only

after the vehicle begins to move.

Symbols

Symbol Specification

Read the message in the infor-

mation display

A flashing symbol indicates that

the parking brake is being

applied. If the symbol flashes in

any other situation then this

means that a fault has arisen.

Read the message on the infor-

mation display.

Messages

Park brake not fully released – A fault is pre-

venting the parking brake from being released.

Contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

120

drive off with this error message showing, a

warning signal sounds.

Parking brake not applied – A fault is pre-

venting the parking brake from being applied.

Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo work-

shop if the message remains.

Parking brake Service required – A fault has

occurred. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault

remains.

WARNING

If the vehicle must be parked before the fault

has been corrected, always put the gear

selector in P and turn the wheels so that

they point away from the curb if the vehicle

is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is

pointing downhill.

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

Introduction

Normally, when the accelerator pedal is

released while driving down hills, the vehicle's

speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm

(the normal engine braking effect). However, if

the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if

the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases

despite the engine braking effect. In this situa-

tion, the brakes must be applied to reduce the

vehicle's speed.

HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and

makes it possible to increase or decrease the

vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using

only the accelerator pedal, without applying

the brakes. The brake system functions auto-

matically to maintain a low and steady speed.

HDC is particularly useful when driving down

steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the

road may have slippery patches.

WARNING

HDC does not function in all situations, and

is a supplementary braking aid. The driver

has full responsibility for driving in a safe

manner.

Function

•HDC can be switched on and off with the

button in the center console. An indicator

light in the button illuminates when HDC is

activated.

•The indicator light in the instrument

panel illuminates and a message is dis-

played when the system is controlling the

vehicle's speed.

•HDC only functions when first or reverse

gears are selected (1 will be shown in the

instrument panel display when first gear is

selected).

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector

is the D position.

Using HDC

HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maxi-

mum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph

(7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator

pedal can be used to select any speed that is

possible in first or reverse gears. When the

accelerator pedal is released, speed is quickly

reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph

(7 km/h), depending on the gear selected,

regardless of the hill's gradient. It is not nec-

essary to apply the brakes.

•The brake lights illuminate automatically

when HDC is controlling the vehicle's

speed.

•The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at

any time by applying the brakes.

HDC is deactivated when:

•The button on the center console is

pressed

•A gear higher than first gear is selected

•D is selected on vehicles with an automatic

transmission

HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is

done while driving down a steep hill, the sys-

tem's braking effect will decrease gradually.

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Engine response to pressure on the accel-

erator pedal may be slightly slower than

normal when HDC is activated.

03 Your driving environment

123

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Menus and messages........................................................................... 126

The MY CAR menus.............................................................................. 128

Climate system..................................................................................... 134

Trip computer........................................................................................ 142

Stability system..................................................................................... 144

Active chassis system–Four C*............................................................. 146

Cruise control........................................................................................ 147

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................ 149

Distance Alert* ..................................................................................... 159

City Safety™ ........................................................................................ 162

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*...... 168

Driver Alert System* ............................................................................. 175

Park assist*........................................................................................... 181

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* .......................................................... 185

Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ 189

Passenger compartment convenience................................................. 193

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Main instrument panel

G022908

Information display and menu controls

READ – access to the list of messages and

message confirmation.

Thumbwheel – browse among menus and

options in the list of functions.

RESET – reset the active function. Used in

certain cases to select/activate a function,

see the explanation under each respective

function.

The menus shown on the information displays

in the instrument panel are controlled with the

left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition

mode. Press READ to erase a message and

return to the menus.

Menu overview

Driving distance on current fuel reserve

Average

Instantaneous

Average speed

Current speed in mph (Canadian models

only)

Engine oil level*

Calibrate tire pressure

Messages

G028940

When a warning, information or indicator sym-

bol comes on, a corresponding message

appears on the information display. An error

message is stored in a memory list until the

fault is rectified.

Press READ to acknowledge and scroll among

the messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are

using the trip computer, the message must

be read and confirmed by pressing READ

before the previous activity can be

resumed.

Message Description

Stop safely Stop and switch off

the engine. Serious

risk of damage.

Contact an author-

ized Volvo work-

shop.

Stopping the

engine

Stop and switch off

the engine. Serious

risk of damage.

Contact an author-

ized Volvo work-

shop.

Service urgent Have the vehicle

checked by an

authorized Volvo

workshop immedi-

ately.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

127

Message Description

Service required Have the vehicle

checked by an

authorized Volvo

workshop as soon

as possible.

See manual Read the owner's

manual.

Book time for

maintenance

Time to book service

at an authorized

Volvo retailer.

Time for regular

maintenance

Time for regular

service at an author-

ized Volvo work-

shop. The timing is

determined by the

number of miles

driven, number of

months since the

last service, engine

running time.

Message Description

Maintenance over-

due

If the service inter-

vals are not fol-

lowed, the warranty

does not cover any

damaged parts.

Contact an author-

ized Volvo workshop

for service.

Temporarily OFF A function has been

temporarily

switched off and is

reset automatically

while driving or after

starting again.

Power save mode The audio system is

switched off to save

current. Charge the

battery.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

128

Introduction

The menu system provides access to menus

for operating many of the vehicle's functions,

such as setting the clock, door mirrors, locks,

etc.

Navigatiing in the menus is done using the but-

tons on the center console control panel or with

the right-side steering wheel keypad.

Some of the features mentioned in this section

are optional.

Operation

Center console controls

Center console controls for menu navigation

Press MY CAR to access the My Car

menus.

Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted

selection or to store a certain function in

the system's memory.

Turn to navigate up/down among menu

selections.

Press and hold to return to the main menu.

Press briefly .

•Press EXIT briefly to go back one step at a

time in the current menu.

•Press and hold EXIT to go to the main MY

CAR menu.

•From the main MY CAR menu, press and

hold EXIT to go to the infotainment sys-

tem's main view. See page 204 for addi-

tional information.

Steering wheel keypad

The keypad varies according to the vehicle's

equipment

Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down

among menu selections. Press the thumb

wheel to make a selection or store a func-

tion in the system's memory.

EXIT.

Paths

The current menu level is displayed at the

upper right of the center console display. Menu

paths are displayed as follows, for example:

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

129

Settings Car settings Lock settings

Doors unlock Driver door, then all

The following is an example of how to set a

function in the menu system:

1. Press the MY CAR button on the center

console control panel.

2. Navigate to a menu, for example

Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and

press it to open a submenu.

3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as

Car settings.

4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the

thumb wheel to open a new submenu.

5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the

thumb wheel to open a submenu with alter-

natives that can be selected.

6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the

desired choice and press the thumb wheel

to put an X in the box.

7. Finish by exiting the menu system either

one step at a time with short presses on

EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to

return to the main menu.

The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in

the center console can be used in the same

way.

MY CAR

All settings connected to driving the

vehicle are found under MY CAR.

When the MY CAR symbol has been

selected, the following menu alternatives are

displayed.

•My XC60

•Support systems

•Settings

MY CAR My XC60

The driver support systems installed in the

vehicle are displayed and can be activated/

deactivated here.

MY CAR Support systems

The current status of the various driver support

systems is displayed.

MY CAR Settings Car settings

All of the settings in the vehicle that can be

changed by the driver can be found under MY

CAR, where they can be activated/deacti-

vated/adjusted. The following pages list the

main menus/submenus and possible selec-

tions.

Car key memory

See pages 84 and 57 for more information.

Lock settings

Automatic door locking

Doors unlock

All doors

Driver door, then all

Keyless entry

All doors

Any door

Doors on same side

Both front doors

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

130

See page 57 and 63 for more information.

Reduced Guard

Activate once

Ask when exiting

See page 70 for more information.

Side mirror settings

Fold mirrors

Tilt left mirror

Tilt right mirror

See page 100 for more information.

Light settings

Door lock confirmation light

Door unlock confirmation light

See page 57 for more information.

Approach light duration

Off

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

See page 58 for more information.

Home safe light duration

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

See page 93 for more information.

Door lock confirmation light

See page 57 for more information.

Daytime running lights

See page 89 for more information.

Active bending lights

See page 90 for more information.

Tire pressure system

Warns if tire pressure is too low

Calibrate tire pressure

See page 294 for more information.

Steering wheel force

High

Medium

Low

See page 146 for more information.

Reset car settings

This feature returns the "Car settings" menu to

the original factory settings.

MY CAR Settings Driver support

systems

Collision warning

Collision Warning

Warning distance

Long

Normal

Short

Warning sound

See page 170 for more information.

Lane departure warning

On at start-up

Increased sensitivity

See page 178 for more information.

DSTC

See page 144 for more information.

City safety

See page 162 for more information.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

131

BLIS

See page 189 for more information.

Distance Alert

See page 159 for more information.

Driver alert

See page 175 for more information.

MY CAR Settings System options

Set/change time

See page 80 for more information.

Time format

12 h

24 h

Screensaver

The contents of the screen are replaced by

another image if this selection is marked. The

contents of the screen will be displayed again

if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see

page 128.

Uncheck the selection to turn the screen saver

off.

Language

Select the language for menu texts.

Show help text

This displays help texts for the current menu.

Distance and fuel units

MPG (UK)

MPG (US)

km/l

l/100km

See page 142 for more information about the

trip computer.

Temperature unit

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Select the temperature scale to be displayed

by the climate control unit.

Volume levels

Voice output volume

Park assist front volume

Park assist rear volume

Phone ringing volume

Reset system options

This feature returns the "System options"

menu to the original factory settings.

MY CAR Settings Voice settingsA.

AOnly on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System

and/or a Bluetooth-connected cell phone

Voice tutorial

Select this menu alternative and press OK for

spoken information about how the system

works.

Voice command list

Phone commands

Phone

Phone call contact

Phone dial number

Navigation commands

Navigation

Navigation repeat instruction

Navigation go to address

General commands

Help

Cancel

Voice tutorial

The menu alternatives under Phone

commands show examples of the voice com-

mands available when a cell phone is con-

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

132

nected to the Bluetooth hands-free system.

See page 237 for more detailed information.

The menu alternatives under Navigation

commands show examples of the voice com-

mands available for the optional Volvo

Navigation System. Refer to the navigation

system's manual for detailed information.

Voice user setting

Default setting

User 1

User 2

Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if

more than one person uses voice commands

regularly. Default setting resets the factory

settings.

Voice training

User 1

User 2

Voice training enables the system to become

familiar with the driver's voice and pronuncia-

tion. A list of phrases is presented on the

screen for the driver to read aloud. When the

system has registered the driver's pronuncia-

tion, no additional phrases will be displayed.

After completed voice training, select User 1

or User 2 in Voice user setting to set the sys-

tem to the current user.

Voice output volume

•A volume control will be displayed. To set

the volume level:

1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel

2. Test the setting by pressing OK

3. Store the setting and leave the menu by

pressing EXIT.

Voice POI list

Edit list

The navigation system has a large number of

points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30 POIs

can be stored in this list.

The menu alternative Voice POI list is only

displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the

optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the

navigation system's manual for detailed infor-

mation.

MY CAR Settings Audio settings

See page 200 for more information about the

infotainment system.

MY CAR Settings Climate settings

Automatic blower adjustment

Normal

High

Low

Recirculation timer

Automatic rear defroster

Interior air quality system

Reset climate settings

This feature returns the "Climate settings"

menu to the original factory settings.

For more information about the climate sys-

tem, see page 134.

MY CAR Settings Favorites (FAV)

See page 207 for more information about this

feature.

MY CAR Settings Information

Number of keys

See page 56 for more information.

VIN number

See page 337 for more information.

DivX® VOD code

See page 222 for more information.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

133

Bluetooth software version in car

See page 228 for more information.

Map and software version

Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System

manual for more information.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Air conditioning

The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate

Control (ECC). The climate control system

cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the pas-

senger compartment.

NOTE

•The air conditioning can be switched

off, but to ensure the best possible cli-

mate comfort in the passenger com-

partment and to prevent the windows

from misting, it should always be on.

•In warm weather, a small amount of

water may accumulate under the car

when it has been parked. This water is

condensation from the A/C system and

is normal.

Sensor location

•The sunlight sensor is located on the top

side of the dashboard.

NOTE

The sunlight sensor monitors which side of

the car that is most exposed to sunlight.

This can mean that the temperature may

differ between the right and left-side air

vents, even if the temperatures set for both

sides of the passenger compartment are the

same.

•The temperature sensor for the passenger

compartment is located below the climate

control panel.

•The outside (ambient) temperature sensor

is located on the door mirror.

•The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-

rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with

clothing or other objects.

Side windows and laminated panoramic

roof

To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-

mally, the side windows, and the laminated

panoramic roof should be closed.

Fog on the inside of the windows

The defroster function should be used to

remove fog or mist from the inside of the win-

dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-

mercially available window washing spray will

also help prevent fogging or misting.

Temporary shut-off of the air

conditioning

The air conditioning is momentarily disen-

gaged during full-throttle acceleration or when

driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a

temporary increase in cabin temperature.

Ice and snow

Always keep the air intake grille at the base of

the windshield free of snow.

Climate system maintenance

Special tools and equipment are required to

maintain and carry out repairs on the climate

system. Work of this type should only be done

by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

Refrigerant

Volvo cares about the environment. The air

conditioning system in your car contains a

CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance

will not deplete the ozone layer. The air condi-

tioning system contains 1.7 lbs (770 g) of

R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.

Passenger compartment filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at

the recommended intervals. Please refer to

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

135

your Warranty and Service Records Informa-

tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for these intervals.

The filter should be replaced more often when

driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The

filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should

always be replaced with a new one.

NOTE

There are different types of cabin air filters.

Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)

A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles

in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels

of odors and contaminants entering the vehi-

cle. The air quality sensor detects increased

levels of contaminants in the outside air. When

the air quality sensor detects contaminated

outside air, the air intake closes and the air

inside the passenger compartment is recircu-

lated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The

filter also cleans recirculated passenger com-

partment air.

NOTE

Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter

replacement intervals.

Materials used in the cabin

The materials used in the cabin have been

developed to help minimize the amount of dust

and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All

floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning.

Use car cleaning products recommended by

Volvo. See also the information beginning on

page 330.

Menu settings

The default settings for four of the climate sys-

tem's functions can be changed in the menu

system.

•Blower speed in automatic mode.

•Recirculation timer for passenger com-

partment air.

•Automatic rear window defrosting.

•The optional Interior Air Quality System

(IAQS).

The functions can also be returned to factory

settings in the menu system.

See page 128 for a description of the menu

system.

Air distribution

G032070

The incoming air is distributed from 20 different

vents in the passenger compartment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode.

If desired, air distribution can be controlled

manually, see page 141.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

136

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Direct the vents into the passenger compart-

ment to help maintain the desired temperature

in the rear seat.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137

Electronic climate control, ECC

Temperature control, driver's side

Heated driver's seat*

Defroster (maximum effect)

Blower

Manual air distribution—floor

Manual air distribution—dashboard air

vents

Manual air distribution—defroster

Heated rear window and door mirrors

Heated front passenger's seat*

Temperature control, passenger's side

Recirculation

AUTO

A/C on/off

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Climate system controls

Heated front seats*

The current seat temperature is shown in the cen-

ter console display

Press the button once for the

highest heat level – three indi-

cator lights come on.

Press the button twice for a

lower heat level – two indica-

tor lights come on.

Press the button three times for the lowest heat

level – one indicator light comes on.

Press the button four times to switch off the

heat – no indicator lights come on.

Seat heating will automatically switch off when

the engine is switched off.

Heated rear seats*

G021376

Heat control for the outboard seating positions

is done in the same way as for the front seats.

Blower control

Turn the control clockwise to

increase or counterclockwise

to decrease the blower

speed. If AUTO is selected,

blower speed will be regula-

ted automatically and this will

override manual adjustment.

NOTE

If the blower is turned off completely, the air

conditioning is disengaged, which may

result in fogging on the windows.

Air distribution

Manual air distribution—defroster

Manual air distribution—dashboard air

vents

Manual air distribution—floor

The figure consists of three buttons. When a

button is pressed, the corresponding figure will

appear in the display with an arrow indicating

which manual air flow has been selected (see

1Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

139

the following illustration). See also the air dis-

tribution chart on page 141.

Air distribution is shown in the center console dis-

play

Auto

The function automatically

regulates cooling, heating,

blower speed, recirculation,

and air distribution to main-

tain the chosen temperature.

If you select one or more man-

ual functions, the other func-

tions continue to be controlled automatically.

The air quality sensor is engaged and all man-

ual settings are switched off when AUTO is

pressed. The display shows AUTO

CLIMATE.

Blower speed in automatic mode can be set

under Climate settings Automatic blower

adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal

or High.

NOTE

Selecting the lowest blower speed may

increases the risk of fog forming on the win-

dows.

Temperature control

The temperatures on the

driver and passenger sides

can be set separately. When

the vehicle is started, the

most recent setting is

resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by

selecting a higher/lower temperature than

the actual temperature required.

A/C – ON/OFF

When the indicator light in the

button is on, the air condition-

ing is controlled automati-

cally. This cools/heats and

dehumidifies the incoming air.

When the indicator light in the

button is off, the air condition-

ing is disengaged. Other functions are still con-

trolled automatically. When maximum

defroster is selected, the air conditioning sys-

tem is set for maximum blower speed and

dehumidification.

Defroster

This function defrosts/de-ices

the windshield and front side

windows. The indicator light

in the defroster button lights

when the function is active.

•Blower speed increases automatically and

the air conditioning will switch on (if not

already on and if the passenger compart-

ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid-

ify the air in the passenger compartment.

Air conditioning can be switched off by

pressing the AC button.

•Recirculation will not function while defrost

is engaged.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The climate system will return to its previous

settings when the defroster function is

switched off.

Recirculation/air quality system

Recirculation

This function can be used to

shut out exhaust fumes,

smoke, etc., from the passen-

ger compartment. The air in

the passenger compartment

is then recirculated, i.e., no air

from outside the car is taken

into the car when this function is activated. The

indicator light in the button will illuminate when

recirculation is selected.

If the air in the car recirculates for too long,

there is a risk of condensation forming on the

insides of the windows, especially in winter.

Timer

The timer function minimizes the risk of fog-

ging, or stale air when the recirculation function

is selected by automatically switching off the

function after a certain length of time, depend-

ing on the ambient temperature. Activate/

deactivate the function under Climate

settings Recirculation timer. See page

128 for a description of the menu system.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation is

always deactivated.

Interior Air Quality System–IAQS*

This system consists of a multifilter and an air

quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases

and particles from the incoming air, thereby

reducing the amounts of odors and contami-

nants entering the vehicle. The air quality sen-

sor detects increased levels of contaminants in

the outside air. When the air quality sensor

detects contaminated outside air, the air intake

closes and the air inside the passenger com-

partment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air

enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recir-

culated passenger compartment air. When the

AUTO button is depressed the air quality sen-

sor is always engaged.

Activate or deactivate this function in Climate

settings Interior air quality system.

NOTE

•The air quality sensor should always be

engaged in order to obtain the best air

in the passenger compartment.

•Recirculation is limited in cold weather

to avoid fogging.

•If the insides of the windows start fog-

ging, disengage the air quality sensor.

Use the defroster function to increase

airflow to the front, side, and rear win-

dows.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

141

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air

flows from the dashboard

air vents. The air is not

recirculated. Air condition-

ing is always engaged.

To remove de-fog/de-

ice the front side win-

dows and windshield

quickly.

Air to the floor and windows.

Some air flows from the

dashboard air vents.

To ensure comfortable

conditions and good de-

fogging in cold or humid

weather.

Air to windshield and side

windows. Some air flows

from the air dashboard

vents.

In cold or humid

weather (blower

speed should be

moderate to high).

Air to floor and from dash-

board air vents.

In sunny weather with

cool outside tempera-

tures.

Airflow to windows and

from dashboard air vents.

To ensure good com-

fort in warm, dry

weather.

Air to floor. Some air flows to

the dashboard air vents and

windows.

To warm or cool the feet.

Airflow to the head and

chest from the dashboard

air vents.

To ensure efficient

cooling in warm

weather.

Airflow to windows, from

dashboard air vents and to

the floor.

To cool the feet or pro-

vide warmer air to the

upper body in cold

weather or hot, dry

weather.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

142

Introduction

G022909

Information display and controls

READ–press to acknowledge/confirm/

erase a message)

Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip

computer menus)

RESET–resets certain functions

To scroll through trip computer information,

move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue

turning to return to the starting point.

Functions

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are

using the trip computer, this message must

be acknowledged in order to return to the

trip computer function. Acknowledge a

message by pressing READ.

To change the unit of measure specified for

distance and speed, contact an authorized

Volvo workshop.

Average speed

The system calculates the average speed from

the last resetting. Reset using RESET.

Current speed in mph (Canadian models

only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-

taneous conversion of the car's current speed

from km/h to mph.

Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-

taneous conversion of the car's current speed

from mph to km/h.

Current fuel consumption

(Instantaneous)

Current fuel consumption is calculated every

second. The information on the display is

updated every few seconds. When the vehicle

is stationary, "----" appears on the display.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption since the last

reset. Reset using RESET.

Driving distance on current fuel reserve

This function shows the approximate distance

that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the

tank. The calculation is based on average fuel

consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)

of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in

the tank when the reading was taken. When the

message ---- miles to empty tank appears in

the display, refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

The actual distance that can be driven on

the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be

influenced by a change in driving style.

See also page 246 for information on driving

economically.

Resetting

1. Select --- mph average speed or --.-

mpg average.

2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 sec-

ond to reset the selected function. If

RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

143

seconds, Average speed and Average fuel

consumption are reset simultaneously.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Stability system

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control

system (DSTC) consists of a number of func-

tions designed help reduce wheel spin, coun-

teract skidding, and to generally help improve

directional stability.

CAUTION

A pulsating sound will be audible when the

system is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce wheel

spin by transferring power from a drive wheel

that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the

opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

TC is most active at low speeds.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and

cannot be switched off.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-

ity, for example when cornering, by braking

one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows

a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and

cannot be switched off.

Spin control (SC)

The spin control function is designed to help

prevent the drive wheels from spinning while

the vehicle is accelerating.

Engine Drag Control (EDC)

EDC helps keep the engine running if the

wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when

shifting down in the Geartronic manual shifting

mode or while using the engine's braking func-

tion on a slippery surface. If the engine were to

stop, power steering would not function, mak-

ing the vehicle more difficult to steer.

Trailer Stability Assist – TSA*

Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle

that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and

trailer have begun to sway. See page 263 for

more information.

This system is automatically deactivated if the

driver selects Sport mode.

Operation

Sport mode

The stability system is always activated and

cannot be switched off.

However, the driver can select Sport mode,

which offers more active driving characteris-

tics. In this mode, the engine management sys-

tem monitors movement of the accelerator

pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by

allowing more lateral movement of the rear

wheels before DSTC is activated.

Under certain circumstances, such as when

driving with snow chains, or driving in deep

snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to

temporarily use Sport mode for maximum

tractive force.

If the driver releases pressure on the acceler-

ator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help sta-

bilize the vehicle.

To switch to Sport mode:

1. Press the My Car button in the center con-

sole control panel and select My XC60

DSTC in the menu.

2. Unselect the symbol by pressing OK/

MENU and press EXIT to leave the menu.

>This puts DSTC in Sport mode.

Sport mode remains active until the driver

switches it off in the menu or until the engine is

switched off. DSTC will return to normal mode

when the engine is restarted.

Symbols in the instrument panel

If the symbols and are displayed

at the same time, read the message in the

information display.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Stability system

145

The symbol is displayed in the main

instrument panel when Sport mode has been

activated.

If the symbol appears alone, it may

appear as follows:

•If the symbol flashes, this indicates that the

stability system is actively functioning to

help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

•If the symbol remains on for approximately

2 seconds after the engine has been

started, this indicates that the system is

performing a self-diagnostic test.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to help

improve driving safety. It supplements, but

can never replace, the driver's judgment

and responsibility when operating the vehi-

cle. Speed and driving style should always

be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Messages in the information display

DSTC Temporarily OFF – system function

has been temporarily reduced due to high

brake disc temperature. The function is acti-

vated automatically when the brakes have

cooled.

DSTC Service required – the system has

been disabled due to a fault. If this occurs:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off

the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If the message remains when the engine is

restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work-

shop to have the system inspected.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Active chassis system–Four C*

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active chassis (Four C)

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con-

trolled Chassis Concept)1, regulates the cha-

racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the

car's driving characteristics can be adjusted.

There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and

Advanced.

NOTE

This system is available on Canadian mod-

els only.

Comfort

Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride

and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm.

This mode is particularly suitable for long-dis-

tance highway driving. The indicator light in the

button will be on when this mode is selected.

Sport

In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is

reduced during cornering and steering

response is more immediate. The transmission

shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The

indicator light in the button will be on to indi-

cate that Sport mode has been selected.

Advanced

In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal

and steering response is very direct. Gear shift-

ing is done at high rpm in each gear for

dynamic and active driving.

Operation

Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console to

change setting. The setting in use when the

engine is switched off is activated the next time

the engine is started.

Speed-dependent steering force*

Steering force increases with the speed of the

vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.

At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in

order to facilitate parking, etc.

Steering force can be changed under MY CAR

Car settings Steering wheel force.

Select Low, Medium or High. For a descrip-

tion of the menu system, see page 128.

NOTE

This steering force level menu function can-

not be accessed when the vehicle is in

motion.

1Available as an option on Canadian models only

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control

147

Operation

G022910

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate

standby mode)

Engaging the cruise control function

Before a speed can be set, the cruise control

system must be engaged (put in standby

mode).

Press the CRUISE button (1).

>The symbol illuminates and the text

(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con-

trol is in standby mode.

NOTE

This does not set the vehicle's speed.

Setting a speed

Use the or buttons set the vehicle's cur-

rent speed. The set speed is shown in the dis-

play.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged at

speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

Adjusting the set speed

After a speed has been set, it can be increased

or decreased by using the or buttons.

1. Press and hold down or until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

> This will become the set speed when the

button is released.

2. Press or for approximately a half

second and release the button to increase

or decrease vehicle speed by approxi-

mately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

•A temporary increase in speed by

pressing the accelerator pedal, for less

than 1 minute (e.g. when passing

another car), does not affect the current

cruise control setting. The vehicle will

automatically return to the previously

set speed when the accelerator pedal is

released.

•If one of the cruise control buttons is

kept depressed for more than approx.

1 minute cruise control is disengaged.

The engine must then be switched off in

order to reset cruise control.

Automatic deactivation

Cruise control is automatically deactivated

temporarily if one of the following occurs:

•If the speed drops below approximately

20 mph (30 km/h).

•When the brake pedal is depressed.

•If the gear selector is moved to position N.

•During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

•If the vehicle's speed is increased by using

the accelerator pedal for more than

1 minute.

The currently set speed will be saved in the

system's memory.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control

148

Temporary deactivation

The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise

control by pressing 0. The saved speed is

shown in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed

If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-

rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The

vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set

speed.

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in speed

after the button has been pressed.

Deactivation

Cruise control is disengaged by pressing

CRUISE, or by switching off the engine. The

set speed is cleared.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavy

traffic or when driving on wet or slippery

roads. Cruise control may not maintain set

speed on steep downgrades.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional

system designed to assist the driver by main-

taining a set speed or a set time interval to the

vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use

on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as

on highways and other main roads.

When the driver has set the desired speed and

the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC

functions as follows:

•If there are no other vehicles in the lane

ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the

set speed.

•If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower

moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys-

tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to help

maintain the set time interval to the vehicle

ahead. When there are no longer slower

moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will

accelerate to resume the set speed.

If ACC is switched off completely or in standby

mode and your vehicle comes too close to

another vehicle ahead, the driver will be

warned by the Distance Alert system (see

page 159).

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover

all driving situations and traffic, weather

and road conditions. The "Function"

section provides information about lim-

itations that the driver must be aware of

before using this feature.

•This system is designed to be a supple-

mentary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's atten-

tion and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed and must intervene if

Adaptive Cruise Control does not main-

tain a suitable speed or suitable dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo technician.

Function

G021412

Function overview

Warning light, braking by driver required

Controls in steering wheel

Radar sensor in front grille

Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:

•A cruise control system to maintain a set

speed

•A system to maintain a set distance to the

vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a

time interval. For example, you can choose

to remain approximately 2 seconds behind

the vehicle ahead. The actual distance

required to maintain a 2-second interval

will vary according the speed of the vehi-

cles.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-

sion avoidance system. The driver is

always responsible for applying the

brakes if the system does not detect

another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react

to people or animals, or small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. It

also does not react to slow moving,

parked or approaching vehicles, or sta-

tionary objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as

city driving or other heavy traffic situa-

tions, in slippery conditions, when there

is a great deal of water or slush on the

road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor

visibility, on winding roads or on high-

way on- or off-ramps.

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same

lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehi-

cle's speed is regulated by accelerating and

braking. The brakes may emit a sound when

they are being modulated by the adaptive

cruise control system. This is normal.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the adaptive

cruise control system modulates the

brakes. Do not rest your foot under the

brake pedal.

The ACC system is designed to smoothly reg-

ulate speed. However, the driver must apply

the brakes in situations that require immediate

braking. This applies when there are great dif-

ferences in speed between vehicles, or if the

vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.

WARNING

Due to limitations in the radar sensor, brak-

ing may occur unexpectedly or not at all,

see page 155.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active

mode at any permitted speed. However, if the

vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)

or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC

disengages (goes into standby mode) and will

no longer modulate the brakes. The driver will

then have to maintain a safe distance to the

vehicle ahead.

WARNING

When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby

mode or is switched off completely, the

brakes will not be modulated automatically.

The driver must assume full control over the

vehicle.

Warning light—driver braking required

Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force

that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the

vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations

requiring more brake force than ACC can pro-

vide and if the driver does not apply the brakes,

an audible signal from the Collision Warning

system will sound and warning light will illumi-

nate (see page 169) in the windshield to alert

the driver to react.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light

contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead may

make the visual warning signal in the wind-

shield difficult to see.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehi-

cles detected by the radar sensor, see

page 155. In some cases there may be no

warning or the warning may be delayed. The

driver should always apply the brakes when

necessary.

Steep inclines and/or heavy loads

ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level

roads. The system may have difficulty main-

taining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead

on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a

heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situa-

tions, the driver should always be prepared to

apply the brakes if necessary.

Operation

Controls and display

Resume previous settings, increase speed

(each additional press increases speed by

1 mph (approximately 2 km/h).

Standby mode on/off

Set time interval

Put in active mode and set a speed

Set speed (parentheses indicate standby

mode)

Time interval while it is being set

Time interval after it has been set

Putting ACC in standby mode

Before ACC can be used to regulate speed

and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must

first be put in standby mode.

To do so:

Press .

The symbol appears in the display and

parentheses (---) indicate that ACC is in

standby mode.

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the

driver's seat belt must be fastened before

ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-

er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's

door is opened, ACC will return to standby

mode.

Setting a speed

Once ACC has been put in standby mode, use

the or buttons to store (set) the vehicle's

current speed. This puts the system in active

mode. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is

shown in the display.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Adaptive cruise control cannot be put in

active mode at speeds below 20 mph

(30 km/h).

When the symbol on the

left side of the display

changes to , the radar sen-

sor has detected another

vehicle ahead. The distance

to a vehicle ahead is only

regulated when this symbol ( ) is illumi-

nated.

Changing the set speed

After a speed has been set, it can be increased

or decreased by using the or buttons.

Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the

vehicle's speed changes by 5 mph

(approximately 8 km/h).

When the system is in active mode, the but-

ton has the same function as , but results in

a smaller increase in speed.

NOTE

•If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control

buttons is pressed for more than

approximately one minute, ACC will be

deactivated. The engine must then be

switched off and restarted to reset ACC.

•In some situations Adaptive Cruise

Control cannot be put in active mode.

Cruise control Unavailable is shown

in the display, see page 157.

Setting a time interval

The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be

increased by pressing and decreased by

pressing . The current time interval is shown

briefly in the display following adjustment.

Different time intervals can be

selected and are shown in the

display as 1–5 horizontal bars.

The greater the number of

bars, the longer the time inter-

val. One bar represents a time

interval of approximately

1 second; 5 bars is approximately

2.5 seconds. At low speeds, when the distance

to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases

the time interval slightly. In order to follow the

vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC

allows the time interval to vary considerably in

certain situations.

WARNING

•Only use a time interval that is suitable

in current traffic conditions.

•A short time interval gives the driver lim-

ited reaction time if an unexpected sit-

uation occurs in traffic.

The number of bars indicating the selected

time interval are shown while the setting is

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

being made and for several seconds afterward.

A smaller version of the symbol is then shown

to the right in the display. The same symbol is

also displayed when Distance Alert is in active

mode, see page 159 .

Standby mode (temporary deactivation)

Press to temporarily deactivate cruise con-

trol (put it in standby mode). The set speed, for

example 55 mph, is then shown in parenthe-

ses.

The previously set speed and time interval are

resumed by pressing .

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in speed

after the button has been pressed.

When ACC is in active mode, the vehicle’s

speed increases by approximately 1 mph

(1 km/h) each additional time is pressed.

Standby mode due to action by the driver

ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in

standby mode:

•when the brakes are applied

•if the driver's seat belt is taken off

•If the driver's door is opened

•if the gear selector is moved to N

•if the accelerator pedal is depressed for

more than 1 minute.

NOTE

If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for

a short time, such as when passing another

vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and

is reactivated when the pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode

Adaptive cruise control is linked to other sys-

tems such as the stability and traction control

system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning

properly, adaptive cruise control is automati-

cally deactivated and will go into standby

mode.

In the event of automatic deactivation, an audi-

ble signal will sound and the message Cruise

control Cancelled is shown in the display.

The driver must then intervene and adapt the

vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and

regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic switch to standby mode may be

caused if:

•the wheels lose traction

•brake temperature is high

•the radar sensor is obstructed by, for

example, wet snow or rain.

Queue Assist*

The following functions are linked to your vehi-

cle's automatic transmission and comprise the

Queue Assist feature.

Please note that the lowest speed that can be

set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can

maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle

ahead down to a standstill.

Enhanced speed interval

Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval

to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed,

including a complete stop.

In order to activate ACC at speeds below

18 mph (30 km/h):

•The vehicle ahead must be within a rea-

sonable distance (not farther away than

approx. 100 ft/30 meters)

•The lowest speed that can be selected is

18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also

help maintain the set time interval to the

vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a

complete stop.

During short stops (less than approximately

3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle

will begin moving again automatically as soon

as the vehicle ahead begins to move.

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle

ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automati-

cally go into standby mode.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in

one of the following ways:

•By pressing

•By accelerating up to at least 3 mph

(4 km/h)

Your vehicle will then resume following the

vehicle ahead at the set time interval.

NOTE

ACC can remain active and keep your vehi-

cle at a standstill for up to 2 minutes. After

2 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake

will be engaged and ACC will go into

standby mode.

To reactivate ACC, the driver must release

the parking brake (see page 119) and press

Automatic standby mode when ACC

changes target vehicles

If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be

a stationary vehicle ahead

The following only applies at speeds below

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h):

If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that

the radar sensor has detected) from a moving

vehicle to a stationary one, the system will

apply the brakes in your vehicle.

WARNING

At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC

will not react to a stationary vehicle and

apply the brakes but will instead accelerate

to the previously set speed. The driver must

actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle.

ACC disengages and goes into standby mode

if:

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the

target object is a stationary vehicle or some

other type of object such as e.g., a speed

bump.

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so

that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to

follow.

No automatic braking when at a

standstill

In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply

the brakes and go into standby mode while the

vehicle is not moving. This means that the

driver will have to apply the brakes.

This happens if:

•The driver presses the brake pedal

•The parking brake is activated

•The gear selected is moved to P,N or R

•The driver presses the button to put

ACC in standby mode

The parking brake is applied

automatically

In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking

brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle

at a standstill.

This happens if:

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

•The driver opens the door or takes off

his/her seat belt

•DSTC is put in Sport mode (see page 144)

•ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for

more than 2 minutes

•The engine has been switched off

•The brakes have overheated

Turning ACC off completely

•From standby mode, press once.

•From active mode, press twice.

The set speed and time interval are then

cleared from the system's memory and cannot

be resumed by pressing .

The radar sensor and its limitations

In addition to being used by ACC, the radar

sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see

page 159) and Collision Warning with Full

Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see

page 168). This sensor is designed to detect

cars or larger vehicles driving in the same

direction as your vehicle, in the same lane.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects, such as extra

headlights, must not be installed in front of

the grille.

Modification of the radar sensor could make

its use illegal.

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles

ahead is impeded:

•if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-

not detect other vehicles, for example in

heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are

obscuring the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the area in front of the radar sensor

clean.

•if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-

cantly different from your own speed.

Situations where ACC may not function

optimally

WARNING

•The radar sensor has a limited field of

vision. In some situations it may detect

a vehicle later than expected or not

detect other vehicles at all.

•If ACC is not functioning properly,

cruise control will also be disabled.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Radar sensor's field of vision (dark gray)

In certain situations, the radar sensor can-

not detect vehicles at close quarters, for

example a vehicle that suddenly enters the

lane between your vehicle and the target

vehicle.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or

vehicles not driving in the center of the lane

may remain undetected.

In curves, the radar sensor may detect the

wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target

vehicle.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover

all driving situations and traffic, weather

and road conditions. The "Function"

section provides information about lim-

itations that the driver must be aware of

before using this feature.

•This system is designed to be a supple-

mentary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's atten-

tion and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed and must intervene if

Adaptive Cruise Control does not main-

tain a suitable speed or suitable dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo technician.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-

sion avoidance system. The driver is

always responsible for applying the

brakes if the system does not detect

another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react

to people or animals, or small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. It

also does not react to slow moving,

parked or approaching vehicles, or sta-

tionary objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as

city driving or other heavy traffic situa-

tions, in slippery conditions, when there

is a great deal of water or slush on the

road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor

visibility, on winding roads or on high-

way on- or off-ramps.

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Radar blocked See manual is

displayed, this means that the radar signals

from the sensor have been obstructed and that

a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.

This, in turn, means that the functions of the

ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning

System with Auto-brake will not function.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157

The table lists possible causes for this mes- sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the

radar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with

the radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect

the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that

it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

- Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.

- Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Description

-Turn on DSTC to enable

Cruise

ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC is in Sport mode. Switch DSTC to

normal operating mode, see page 144 for more information.

ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC's Spin control is switched off. See

page 144 for more information.

-Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off.

The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.

-Cruise control Unavailable ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:

•high brake temperature

•the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)

Radar blocked See manual ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot

detect other vehicles.

See page 155 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Cruise control Service

required

ACC is not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Press Brake To hold + an

audible signal

The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep

the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.

The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal

will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

–Below 20 mph Only follow-

ing

This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle

ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

Introduction

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol and is a function that provides information

about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Distance Alert is active at speeds above

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval

information is only given for a vehicle that is

driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direc-

tion. No information is provided for vehicles

driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a

standstill.

Amber warning light

An amber warning light in the windshield glows

steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one

ahead than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance Alert only monitors distance to the

vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control

is in standby mode or off.

WARNING

Distance Alert only indicates the distance to

the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the

speed of your vehicle.

Operation

Press the button in the center instrument panel

to switch this function on or off. The indicator

light in the button illuminates when the function

is on.

Depending on the optional equipment

selected, there may not be room for a Distance

Alert button in the center console. In this case,

the function is controlled through the menu

system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings

Car settings Distance alert On/Off.

Setting a time interval

Controls and display

Time interval: Increase/decrease

Time interval: On, while it is being set

Time interval: On, after it has been set

Press to increase the interval or to

decrease it.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert*

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Five different time intervals

can be selected and are

shown in the display as 1–5

horizontal bars. The greater

the number of bars, the longer

the time interval. One bar rep-

resents approximately

1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is

approximately 2.5 seconds.

The number of bars indicating

the selected time interval are

shown while the setting is

being made and for several

seconds afterward. A smaller

version of the symbol is then

shown to the right in the dis-

play. The same symbol is displayed when

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated.

NOTE

•The higher your vehicle’s speed, the

greater the distance to the vehicle

ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a

given time interval.

•The set time interval is also used by

Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 151.

WARNING

Only use a time interval that is suitable in

current traffic conditions.

Limitations

Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor

used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col-

lision Warning system. See page 155 for more

information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light

contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead may

make the visual warning signal in the wind-

shield difficult to see.

WARNING

•Bad weather or winding roads may

affect the radar sensor’s capacity to

detect vehicles ahead.

•The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a

motorcycle, may also make it difficult to

detect. This may result in the warning

light illuminating at a shorter distance

than the one that has been set, or that

the light will not come on at all.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

Radar blocked See manual Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and

cannot detect other vehicles. See page 155 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service

required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning

properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

162

Introduction

City Safety™1 is a support system designed to

help the driver avoid low speed collisions when

driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic.

City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s

speed is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h).

This means that City Safety™ will not react if

your vehicle approaches another vehicle at

very low speed, for example, when parking.

The function is active at speeds ranging from

approximately 2-18 mph (4-30 km/h) and

assists the driver by applying the brakes auto-

matically, thereby avoiding or helping to

reduce the effects of a collision.

City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late

as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa-

tion.

City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a

low-speed collision is imminent. However, the

system will not intervene in situations where

the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies

the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoi-

ded. This is done in order to always give the

driver’s actions highest priority.

City Safety™ activates in situations where the

driver has not applied the brakes in time, which

means that the system cannot help the driver

in all situations.

City Safety™ should not be used to alter the

way in which the driver operates the vehicle.

The driver should never rely solely on this sys-

tem to safely stop the vehicle.

Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not

be aware of City Safety™ except when the

system intervenes when a low-speed collision

is imminent.

If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional

Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems

interact. For more information about the Colli-

sion Warning with Auto-brake system, see

page 168.

WARNING

•City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to

the driver. It can never replace the

driver’s attention to traffic conditions or

his/her responsibility for operating the

vehicle in a safe manner.

•City Safety™ does not function in all

driving situations or in all traffic, weather

or road conditions.

•City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles

traveling in the same direction as your

vehicle and does not react to small vehi-

cles, bicycles or motorcycles or to peo-

ple or animals.

•City Safety™ is not activated when your

vehicle is backing up.

•City Safety™ functions at speeds up to

18 mph (30 km/h). This system can help

prevent a collision if the difference in

speed between your vehicle and the

vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph

(15 km/h). If the difference in speed is

greater, a collision cannot be avoided

but the speed at which the collision

occurs can be reduced. The driver must

apply the vehicle’s brakes for full brak-

ing effect.

•Never wait for City Safety™ to intervene

in a potential collision situation. The

1City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

163

driver is always responsible for main-

taining a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Function

Location of the laser sensor in the windshield

City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you

using a laser sensor mounted in the upper sec-

tion of the windshield. If a collision is imminent,

City Safety™ will automatically apply the

brakes, which may feel like hard braking.

•If the difference in speed between your

vehicle and the vehicle ahead is between

approximately 2-9 mph (4-15 km/h), City

Safety™ can help prevent a collision from

taking place.

•If the difference in speed is between

approximately 10-18 mph (15-30 km/h),

City Safety™ alone cannot avoid a colli-

sion. The driver must apply the brakes for

full braking effect.

When the function activates and applies the

brakes, a message will appear in the informa-

tion display to indicate that the system is/has

been active.

NOTE

•When City Safety™ applies the brakes,

the brake lights will illuminate.

•In cases where City Safety™ has stop-

ped the vehicle, the system will then

release the brakes. The driver must

apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at

a standstill.

Using City Safety™

NOTE

The City Safety™ function is activated auto-

matically each time the engine has been

switched off and restarted.

On and Off

In certain situations, it may be desirable to

switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving

in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.

may obscure the hood and windshield.

When the engine is running, City Safety™ can

be switched off as follows:

Press My Car in the center console control

panel and go to Settings Car settings

Driver support systems City safety.

Select Off.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-

tion is in mode II or higher, even if City

Safety™ has been switched off.

To switch City Safety™ on again:

•Follow the same procedure as for switch-

ing City Safety™ off but select ON by

pressing RESET.

•Vehicles not equipped with keyless

drive: Press lightly on the remote key to

release it partially from the ignition slot.

Press the remote key into the ignition slot

again. Depress the brake pedal and press

the START/STOP ENGINE button to start

the engine. This restarts City Safety™.

•Vehicles equipped with the optional

keyless drive: Press the START/STOP

ENGINE button to switch off the engine.

Depress the brake pedal and press the

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

164

START/STOP ENGINE button to start the

engine. This restarts City Safety™.

See page 81 for information on ignition modes.

City Safety™ will be automatically switched on

the next time the engine is started, even if it was

off when the engine was switched off.

Limitations

The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed

to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles

ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and dark-

ness.

However, there are certain limitations and the

laser sensor’s function may be reduced by, for

example, heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense

fog or thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa-

tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield may

also interfere with the sensor’s function.

Objects such as warning flags hanging from

long objects on the roof or accessories such as

auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front

of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may

also impede the sensor’s function.

Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa-

ses on slippery road surfaces, which may

reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli-

sion. In situations like this, the DSTC system

(see page 144) will help provide the best pos-

sible braking capacity and stability.

City Safety™ emits infrared light and measures

the way in which the light is reflected. There-

fore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective sur-

faces may not be detected. Normally, the

license plate and taillight reflectors give the

rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflec-

tive surfaces to be detected.

NOTE

•Keep the windshield in front of the laser

sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. See

page 163.

•Snow or ice on the hood deeper than

2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen-

sor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow.

•Do not mount or in any way attach any-

thing on the windshield that could

obstruct the laser sensor.

Troubleshooting

If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in

the information display, this indicates that the

City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in

some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of

you, which means that the system is not func-

tioning.

However, this message will not be displayed in

all situations in which the sensor is obstructed.

For this reason, the driver must ensure that the

area of the windshield in front of the sensor is

always kept clean.

The following table shows some of the situa-

tions that can cause the message to be dis-

played and suggested actions.

Cause Action

The area of the

windshield in front of

the sensor is dirty or

covered by ice or

snow.

Clean the wind-

shield or remove the

ice/snow.

The laser sensor's

field of view is

obstructed.

Remove the

obstruction.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

165

CAUTION

If a crack, scratch or stone chip should

occur in the section of the windshield in

front the laser sensor and covers an area of

approximately 1/50 x 1/10 in. (0.5 x 3 mm)

or larger, contact a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician to repair or replace

the windshield (see the illustration showing

the location of the sensor on page 163).

Failing to do so may result in reduced City

Safety™ functionality.

To help prevent reduced functionality,

please also observe the following:

•If the windshield is replaced, use the

same type or a windshield approved by

Volvo.

•When replacing windshield wipers, use

the same type or ones approved by

Volvo.

The laser sensor

The upper decal describes the laser beam's

classification and contains the following text:

Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly

with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class

1M laser product.

The lower decal describes the laser beam's

physical data and contains the text:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with

FDA performance standards for laser products

except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice

No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001

The laser beam's physical data is listed in the

following table:

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse length 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal × verti-

cal)

28° × 12°

NOTE

The function of aftermarket laser detectors

may be affected by City Safety's laser sen-

sor.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-

tion is in mode II or higher, even if City

Safety™ has been switched off.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

166

WARNING

Eye injury may occur if any of the following

points are not followed:

•It is essential that all pertinent instruc-

tions be followed when handling laser

instruments. Testing, repairing, remov-

ing, adjusting and/or replacing any

components in the laser sensor may

only be done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•Do not remove the laser sensor (includ-

ing removal of the lenses). A laser sen-

sor that has been removed belongs to

laser class 3B according to standard

IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B

present a risk of injury to the eyes.

•The laser sensor’s connector must be

disconnected before the sensor is

removed from the windshield.

•The laser sensor must be mounted in

place on the windshield before con-

necting the sensor’s connector.

•Do not view the laser sensor (which

emits spreading, invisible laser beams)

with optical instruments from a distance

of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

Symbols and messages in the display

When City Safety™ automatically applies the

brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main

instrument panel may illuminate and its asso-

ciated message will be displayed.

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the READ button on the turn signal

lever.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

167

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.

•Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).

For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 164.

City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not functioning.

•If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the

driver if there is a risk of a collision with a

pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a stand-

still or one that is moving in the same direction

as your vehicle.

Collision Warning consists of the following

three functions:

•Collision Warning warns the driver of a

potential collision situation.

•Brake Support helps the driver brake effi-

ciently in a critical situation.

•Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-

cally if a collision with a pedestrian or

another vehicle cannot be avoided and the

driver does not apply the brakes in time or

steer around the person/vehicle. Auto-

brake can help prevent a collision or

reduce the speed at which a collision

occurs.

Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake

and Pedestrian Detection is activated in cir-

cumstances where the driver should have

begun braking much sooner, the system will

not be able to assist the driver in all situations.

This system is designed to activate as late as

possible to help avoid unnecessary interven-

tion.

The system should not be used in such a way

that the driver changes his/her way of operat-

ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the

system, the chances of an accident eventually

occurring increase considerably.

The Collision Warning and City Safety™ sys-

tems supplement each other. See page 162 for

detailed information about City Safety™.

WARNING

•Collision Warning does not work in all

driving, traffic, weather and road condi-

tions. It does not react to vehicles not

traveling in the same direction as your

vehicle.

•Collision Warning does not react to ani-

mals.

•Warnings are only provided when the

risk of collision is high. The "Function"

section provides information about lim-

itations that the driver must be aware of

before using Collision Warning.

•Collision Warning will not provide a

warning or brake the vehicle for pedes-

trians at speeds above 50 mph

(80 km/h).

WARNING

•Collision Warning will not provide a

warning or brake the vehicle for pedes-

trians in darkness or in tunnels, even if

there is street lighting in the area.

•The auto-brake function can help pre-

vent a collision or reduce the speed at

impact but the driver should always

apply the brakes for the best possible

braking effect, even if auto-brake is

actively applying the brakes.

•Never wait for a collision warning. This

system is designed to be a supplemen-

tary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's atten-

tion and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed, even when the colli-

sion warning system is in use.

•Maintenance of the Collision Warning

system's components must only be

performed by a trained and qualified

Volvo technician.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

Function

Function overview

Visual warning signal, collision risk

Radar sensor

Camera

Collision Warning

The radar sensor and the camera work

together to detect a pedestrian, stationary

vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the

same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk

of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian, the

driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light

and an audible warning signal. Collision warn-

ing is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h).

Brake Support

If the risk of collision continues to increase after

the collision warning has been given, Brake

Support is activated. Brake Support prepares

the brake system to react quickly, and the

brakes are applied slightly. This may be expe-

rienced as a light tug.

If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking

effect will be provided. Brake Support also

increases brake force if the system determines

that the driver has not applied adequate pres-

sure on the brake pedal.

Auto-brake

If a collision is imminent and the driver has not

applied the brakes or begun to steer around the

vehicle or pedestrian, the auto-brake function

is activated without the driver pressing the

brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help

reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision

occurs or limited brake force is applied if this

is sufficient to avoid the collision.

NOTE

The auto-brake and brake support functions

are always on and cannot be turned off.

Operation

Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the

center console control panel and using the

menus displayed.

On and off

To switch Collision Warning on or off, press MY

CAR on the center console control panel and

go to Settings Car settings Collision

warning On/Off. If Collision Warning is on,

the system will perform a self-test each time

the engine is started by briefly illuminating the

warning light. See page 129 for more informa-

tion about the menu system.

When the engine is switched on, the Collision

Warning setting that was being used when it

was switched off will be the default setting.

Activating/deactivating warning signals

The collision warning system’s visual signals

are activated automatically when the engine is

started if the collision warning system is

switched on.

The audible warning signal can be activated/

deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center

console control panel and going to Settings

Car settings Collision warning

Warning sound On/Off.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Setting a warning distance

This setting determines the distance at which

the visual and audible warnings are triggered.

Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY

CAR on the center console control panel and

going to Settings Car settings

Collision warning Warning distance.

The warning distance determines the level of

sensitivity used by the system. The warning

distance Long provides an earlier warning.

Begin by using Long and if the system gives

too many warnings, try changing to Normal.

WARNING

•The setting Short should only be used

in situations where traffic is light and

moving at low speeds.

•Collision Warning alerts the driver to the

risk of a collision but this function can-

not reduce the driver’s reaction time.

•For Collision Warning to be as effective

as possible, it is recommended that Dis-

tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see

page 159.

NOTE

•When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,

the warning light and signal will be used

by that function, even if the warnings

provided by Collision Warning have

been deactivated by the driver.

•In situations where traffic is moving at

considerably different speeds, or if the

vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn-

ings may be considered to be late, even

if the setting Long has been selected.

Checking settings

The current Collision Warning settings can be

checked by pressing MY CAR on the center

console control panel and going to Settings

Car settings Collision warning.

Limitations

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-

trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is

not looking straight ahead may make the visual

warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.

For this reason, always activate the audible

warning signal.

Slippery driving conditions increase braking

distance, which can reduce the system's

capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi-

tions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide the

best possible braking effect while helping to

maintain stability.

NOTE

The visual warning signal may be temporar-

ily disengaged in the event of high passen-

ger compartment temperature due to strong

sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible

warning signal will be used, even if it has

been deactivated in the menu system.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

WARNING

•In certain situations, the system cannot

provide warnings or warnings may be

delayed if traffic conditions or other

external factors make it impossible for

the radar sensor or camera to detect a

pedestrian or a vehicle ahead.

•Warnings may not be provided if the

distance to the vehicle ahead is short,

or if movements of the steering wheel/

brake pedal are great, such as during

active driving.

•The sensor system has a limited range

for pedestrians and provides warnings

and braking effect most effectively at

speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For sta-

tionary or slow-moving vehicles, the

system functions best if your vehicle’s

speed is below approximately 45 mph

(70 km/h).

•Warnings for stationary or slow-moving

vehicles may not be provided in dark

conditions or in poor visibility.

The Collision Warning system uses the same

radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For

more information on the radar sensor and its

limitations, see page 155.

NOTE

If warnings are given too frequently, the

warning distance can be reduced (see

page 170). This causes the system to pro-

vide later warnings, which decreases the

total number of warnings provided.

WARNING

•The system is not activated at speeds

under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There-

fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you

approach a vehicle ahead at very low

speed, such as when parking.

•The driver's actions always have high-

est priority and override the Collision

Warning system. This means that the

system will not intervene in situations

where the driver is actively steering,

braking or pressing the accelerator

pedal, even if a collision is imminent.

•When Auto-brake has prevented a col-

lision with a stationary object, your vehi-

cle will remain at a standstill for approx.

1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been

braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your

vehicle's speed will be reduced to the

same speed as that vehicle's.

The camera’s limitations

The camera is used by Collision Warning with

Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see

page 175), and Lane Departure Warning (see

page 178).

NOTE

•To help protect the camera in very hot

conditions, it may be temporarily

switched off for approximately 15

minutes after the engine has been

started.

•Keep the section of the windshield in

front of the camera clean and free of ice,

snow, or condensation.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•The camera has the same limitations as

the human eye. In other words, its

“vision is impaired” by adverse weather

conditions such as heavy snowfall,

dense fog, etc. These conditions may

reduce the function of systems that

depend on the camera or cause these

systems to temporarily stop function-

ing.

•Never place any objects, decals, etc.,

on the windshield in front of the camera.

This could reduce or block the camera’s

function, and could cause one or more

of the systems that utilize the camera to

stop functioning.

•Strong sunlight, reflections from the

road surface, ice or snow covering the

road, a dirty road surface, or unclear

lane marker lines may drastically reduce

the camera’s capacity to detect the side

of a lane, a pedestrian or another vehi-

cle.

Pedestrians

The system cannot identify all pedestrians

The Collision Warning system can only identify

and detect a pedestrian who is standing

upright. This person can be standing still, walk-

ing or running.

This means that the system has to be able to

identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs,

the upper and lower parts of the body and a

person's pattern of movement when walking or

running.

If parts of the body are not visible to the cam-

era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian.

The following conditions apply:

•In order to detect a pedestrian, the system

must have a full view of the person's entire

body and the person must be at least

32 in. (80 cm) tall.

•The system cannot detect a pedestrian

carrying a large object.

•The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian

at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for

the human eye.

•The camera's function is deactivated and

will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or

in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in

the area.

WARNING

•Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake

and Pedestrian Detection is designed to

be a supplementary driving aid. It is not,

however, intended to replace the driv-

er's attention and judgement. The driver

is always responsible for operating the

vehicle in a safe manner.

•The system cannot detect all pedes-

trians in all situations, such as in dark-

ness/at night and cannot detect parti-

ally hidden pedestrians, people who are

less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or

people wearing clothing that obscures

the contours of their bodies.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Windscreen Sensors

blocked is displayed, this means that the cam-

era is obscured and cannot detect pedestrians,

vehicles or road marker lines in front of the

vehicle.

This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with

Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection,

Lane Departure Warning, and Driver Alert Con-

trol will not have full functionality.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-

sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered

with ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the

camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the

display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register

visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this

surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

Collis'n warning OFF Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will dis-

appear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the READ button.

Collision warn. Unavaila-

ble

Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate

the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Description

Auto braking was acti-

vated

Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the READ button.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by

snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see

page 171 for more information on the camera’s limitations.

Radar blocked See man-

ual

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for

example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other

vehicles, see page 155 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service

required

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

Introduction

The Driver Alert System is designed to help a

driver who may be becoming fatigued or who

is inadvertently leaving the lane.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-

ent functions that can be switched on together

or separately.

•Driver Alert Control (DAC)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see

page 178

When one or both of the functions has been

switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti-

vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of

40 mph (65 km/h).

The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed

goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).

Both functions use a camera that is dependent

on the road/lane being clearly marked by pain-

ted lines on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not function in

all situations and is designed to be a sup-

plementary aid. It is not, however, intended

to replace the driver’s attention and judge-

ment.

Driver Alert Control (DAC)–

introduction

This function is intended to alert the driver if

his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the

driver is distracted or fatigued.

NOTE

The camera has certain limitations, see

page 155.

A camera monitors the painted lines marking

the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and

compares the direction of the road with the

driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The

driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow

the lane smoothly.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang-

ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be

used on main roads and is not meant for use in

city traffic.

WARNING

•DAC is not intended to extend the dura-

tion of driving. Always plan breaks at

regular intervals to help remain alert.

•In certain cases, fatigue may not affect

the driver’s behavior. In situations of

this type, no warning will be provided.

Therefore, it is important to take breaks

at regular intervals, regardless of

whether or not DAC has given a warn-

ing.

Limitations

In certain situations, DAC may provide warn-

ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not

become erratic.

•if the driver is testing the LDW function

•in strong crosswinds

•on grooved road surfaces.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operating DAC

Certain settings can be made from the menu

system controlled from the center instrument

panel.

The current system status can be checked on

the trip computer’s display by using the but-

tons on the left steering wheel lever.

Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver

Alert is displayed. The second line shows

the alternatives Off,

Standby <40 mph (<65 km/h), Unavaila

ble or [-----], i.e., the number of bars.

READ button. Confirms and erases a mes-

sage in the display.

Activating DAC

Press MY CAR in the center instrument panel

and go to Car settings Support systems

Driver Alert on.

The function is activated when the

vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph

(65 km/h). The display will show level

markings of 1–5 bars, where a low

number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high

number of bars indicates stable driving.

If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the

driver will be alerted by an audible signal and

the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is

displayed. The warning will be repeated after a

short time if the driving pattern remains the

same.

WARNING

•An alert should be taken seriously since

it is sometimes difficult for a driver to

realize that he/she is fatigued.

•In the event of a warning or if the driver

feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible

in a safe place and rest.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

-Driver Alert Off The function is not switched on.

-Driver Alert Standby

<40 mph (65 km/h)

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

Symbol Message Description

-Driver Alert

Unavailable

The road lacks clear marker lines.

Driver Alert The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low

number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area

of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 171 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message

remains in the display.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)–

introduction

This function is designed to help reduce the

risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle

leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off

the road or into the opposite lane. LDW con-

sists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side

marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible

signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line

or the road’s center dividing line.

Operation and function

LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the

button on the center console. A light in the but-

ton illuminates when the function is on.

The trip computer display shows Lane Depart

Warn Standby <40 mph (65 km/h) when the

function is in standby mode.

When LDW is in standby mode, the function is

activated automatically after the camera has

monitored the road’s side marker lines and the

vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h).

Lane Depart Warn Available will be dis-

played.

If the vehicle’s speed falls below 37 mph

(60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode

and Lane Depart Warn Standby <40 mph

(65 km/h) will be displayed.

If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s

side marker lines, Lane Depart Warn

Unavailable will be displayed.

If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s

left or right side marker lines, the driver will be

alerted by an audible signal.

No warning signal will be given in the follow-

ing situations:

•The turn signal is being used

•The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1

•The throttle pedal is pressed quickly1

•If the steering wheel is moved quickly1

•In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s

body to sway

See page 171 for information on the camera’s

limitations.

WARNING

The driver will only be warned once for each

time the wheels cross a marker line. No

alarm will be given if a marker line is

between the wheels.

1When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

Settings

Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be

made in the menu system by pressing My

Car. Go to Settings Car settings

Support systems Lane Departure

Warning.

There are two alternatives:

On at start-up: This selection switches LDW

on each time the engine is started. Otherwise,

the system will be in the mode that it was in

when the engine was switched off.

Increased sensitivity: This selection increa-

ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be

given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations

apply. When this setting is being used, the sys-

tem only needs to monitor lane marker lines on

one side of the vehicle to change status to

Lane Depart Warn Available.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/Lane

departure warning OFF

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

-Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

-Lane Depart Warn Standby

<40 mph (65 km/h)

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph

(65 km/h).

-Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Description

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean

the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 171 for information on the camera’s

limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the

message remains in the display.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

Introduction

The park assist system is designed to assist

you when driving into parking spaces, garages,

etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located

in one or both bumpers to measure the dis-

tance to a vehicle, object, or a person who may

be close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An

audible signal and symbols in the audio sys-

tem’s display indicate the distance to the

object.

This system is available in the rear bumper

only, or in both the front and rear bumpers.

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT a

safety system. This system is designed to

be a supplementary aid when parking the

vehicle. It is not, however, intended to

replace the driver's attention and judge-

ment.

Function

Park assist button

The system is activated automatically when the

vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-

ton in the center console illuminates when the

system is on.

•The front park assist system is active from

the time the engine is started until the vehi-

cle exceeds a speed of approximately

10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the

vehicle is backing up.

•Rear park assist is active when the engine

is running and reverse gear has been

selected.

Activating/deactivating

The system is activated automatically when the

vehicle is started.

Press the Park assist button on the center

console to temporarily deactivate the sys-

tem(s).

> The indicator light in the button will go

out when the system has been deacti-

vated.

Park assist will be automatically reactivated the

next time the engine is started, or if the button

is pressed (the indicator light in the button will

illuminate).

NOTE

Park assist is disengaged automatically

when the parking brake is applied.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Signals from the park assist system

View in the display (warning for objects front left/

right rear)

Visual indicator

The audio system’s display gives an overview

of the vehicle’s position in relation to a

detected object.

The marked sectors in the display indicate that

one or more of the sensors has detected an

object. The closer the car symbol comes to a

sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object.

If the infotainment system is switched off, the

park assist system will not be able to provide a

visual indicator. An audible signal will still be

provided.

Audible signal

The Park Assist system uses an intermittent

tone that pulses faster as you come close to an

object, and becomes constant when you are

within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object

in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are

objects within this distance both behind and in

front of the vehicle, the tone alternates

between front and rear speakers.

NOTE

The level of the audible signal can be low-

ered/raised with the infotainment volume

control. The level can also be set in the MY

CAR menu system, see page 129.

If the volume of another source from the audio

system is high, this will be automatically low-

ered.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle is

approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal

comes from the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towing

a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted

carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park

assist system's sensors.

NOTE

Rear park assist is deactivated automati-

cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine

trailer wiring is used.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle

is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig-

nal comes from the audio system's front

speakers.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliary

headlights and front park assist since these

lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE

Front park assist is deactivated when the

parking brake is applied and or when the

gear selector is in the P position.

Faults in the system

If the information symbol illuminates and Park

assist syst Service required is shown on the

information display, this indicates that the sys-

tem is not functioning properly and has been

disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assist

system may give unexpected warning sig-

nals that can be caused by external sound

sources that use the same ultrasound fre-

quencies as the system. This may include

such things as the horns of other vehicles,

wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,

motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does

not indicate a fault in the system.

Cleaning the sensors

G031402

Location of the front sensors

Location of the rear sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

with water and a suitable car washing deter-

gent.

Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause

incorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,

snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-

ing signals from the park assist system.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

Introduction

The Park Assist Camera uses the display in the

center console to show the area behind the car

while you are backing up.

PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen

image to indicate the direction that the vehicle

will take as it moves rearward, which helps

simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight

space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle.

NOTE

PAC can only be installed on vehicles equip-

ped with the Volvo’s own navigation system

VNS.

WARNING

•PAC is designed to be a supplementary

aid when parking the vehicle. It is not,

however, intended to replace the

driver’s attention and judgment.

•The camera has blind spots where it

cannot detect objects or people behind

the vehicle.

•Pay particular attention to people or ani-

mals that are close to the vehicle.

Function

The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and

if a person or animal should suddenly appear

from the side.

PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the open-

ing handle.

The camera has built-in electronics that help

reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image

shown on the screen is as natural as possible.

This may cause some objects on the screen to

“lean,” which is normal.

WARNING

Objects seen on the screen may be closer

than they appear to be.

Ambient lighting conditions

The camera automatically monitors the ambi-

ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and

constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may

cause the brightness and quality of the image

on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light

is increased in dark conditions or in bad

weather, which may affect image quality.

If the image on the screen seems too dark,

brightness can be increased with the thumb

wheel on the lighting panel.

NOTE

In order to function properly, the camera

lens should always be kept clean. This is

particularly important in bad weather. Keep

the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Using PAC

Activation

PAC is activated when the gear selector is

moved to R if the system is selected in the MY

CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM

button in the center console. See page 128 for

a description of the menu system.

If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use,

PAC will automatically override the navigation

system to show the camera's image on the

screen instead of navigation information, for as

long as reverse gear is selected.

Zoom

The camera can be useful when attaching a

trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer

hitch (and press this button again to return to

the normal camera view).

With the camera zoomed in on the trailer hitch,

a guiding line showing the hitch's path toward

the trailer will be projected. This feature can be

activated in the MY CAR menu, see

page 129. The guiding lines for the wheels (see

the following section "Guiding lines") and for

the trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the

same time.

If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed)

image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press

EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view.

Deactivation

Move the gear selector from R to another posi-

tion. There is a slight delay in the PAC system,

which means that the view from behind the

vehicle will remain on the screen for approxi-

mately 15 seconds after the gear selector has

been moved from the R position or until the

vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the

mode that it was in before R was selected and

will, for example, display navigation system

information.

NOTE

If any button on the center console control

panel is pressed, the camera image will dis-

appear from the display. Pressing CAM will

return the camera image to the display.

Guiding lines

The lines on the screen are projected as if they

were a path on the ground behind the vehicle

and are affected by the way in which the steer-

ing wheel is turned. This enables the driver to

see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she

turns the steering wheel while backing up.

NOTE

When backing up with a trailer, the guiding

lines show the path that the vehicle will

take, not the trailer.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

WARNING

Keep in mind that the image on the screen

only shows the area behind the vehicle. The

driver must always watch for people, ani-

mals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of

the vehicle when turning while backing up.

Marker lines

The PAC system's lines

Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter)

zone behind the vehicle

Marker line for the clear back-up zone

"Wheel tracks"

The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft

(30 centimeters) of the rear bumper.

The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of

approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the

bumper. These lines also indicate the outmost

limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of

the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle ,

even when the it turns.

The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side marker

lines show where the wheels will roll and can

extend up to approximately 10.5 ft (3.2 m)

behind the bumper if there are no objects in the

way.

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist

Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate distance

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park

Assist system, the distance to an object will be

indicated more exactly and colored markers in

the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has

detected the object.

The markers change color (from yellow to

orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to

the object.

Marker (color) Distance to

object

Yellow more than 5 ft (1.5 m)

Orange 5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m)

Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Settings

Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view

is displayed and make the desired settings.

Parking camera settings

•Mark Park Assist lines to display the side-

lines while backing up.

•Mark Distance information to display the

intersecting lines while backing up.

Activating the system

•Mark Automatic to activate PAC each

time reverse gear is selected.

•Mark Off to turn off PAC completely.

Summary

•The camera is activated when the gear

selector is moved to R (this can be

changed in the MY CAR menu) and the

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

image is shown on the center console dis-

play.

•When backing up, two solid lines are pro-

jected on the screen to show the path that

the vehicle's rear wheels will take. These

lines are affected by movements of the

steering wheel. The vehicle's approximate

outer dimension are shown by two dashed

lines.

•The graphic lines will not be displayed

when backing up with a trailer that is con-

nected to the vehicle's electrical system.

•Objects on the ground that are closer than

1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be detected by

the camera.

•The camera is active for approx.

5 seconds after the gear selector is moved

to R or until the vehicle's speed exceeds

6 mph (10 km/h).

•The optional Park Assist sensors and the

parking camera work together and infor-

mation from the sensors is shown graphi-

cally on the display.

•The graphic lines shown on the screen

when the vehicle backs up can be disabled

in the settings menu.

•Manual zoom can be selected in the MY

CAR menu.

•The system can be switched off by press-

ing CAM. By default, the system is acti-

vated when the gear selector is moved to

R. This setting can be changed in the in MY

CAR menu.

•If there are two cameras installed on the

vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn

TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to

be active), press CAM repeatedly or use

the center console controls. If the front

camera is on, it overrides the optional park

assist system's visual indicator but there

will still be an audible signal.

Limitations

Even if a fairly small section of the screen image

appears to be obstructed, this may mean that

a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hid-

den and objects there may not be detected

until they are very near the vehicle.

NOTE

Bicycle carriers or other accessories moun-

ted on the tailgate may obstruct the cam-

era's field of view.

Keep in mind

•Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and

snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to

avoid scratching the lens.

•Clean the lens regularly with warm water

and a suitable car washing detergent.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189

Introduction

G031404

BLIS camera

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an

information system that indicates the presence

of another vehicle moving in the same direction

as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind

area."

CAUTION

The BLIS system should only be repaired by

a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

WARNING

•BLIS is an information system, NOT a

warning or safety system.

•BLIS does not eliminate the need for

you to visually confirm the conditions

around you, and the need for you to turn

your head and shoulders to make sure

that you can safely change lanes.

•As the driver, you have full responsibility

for changing lanes in a safe manner.

The system is based on digital camera tech-

nology. The cameras are located beneath the

side-view mirrors.

When one (or both) of the cameras have

detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to

approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of

your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.

(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see

the illustration, the indicator light in the door

panel illuminates. The light will glow continu-

ously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the

blind area.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates on

the side of the vehicle where the system has

detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is

passed on both sides at the same time, both

lights will illuminate.

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the

driver if a fault should occur with the system.

For example, if one or both of the system's

cameras are obscured, a message (see the

table on page 191) will appear in the informa-

tion display in the instrument panel. If this

occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,

the system can be temporarily switched off (for

instructions, see page 191).

Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx.

31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft.

(3 meters)

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

When does BLIS function

The system functions when your vehicle is

moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

When you pass another vehicle:

The system reacts when you pass another

vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)

faster than that vehicle.

When you are passed by another vehicle:

The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by

another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph

(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

•BLIS does not function in sharp curves.

•BLIS does not function when your vehi-

cle is backing up.

•If you are towing a wide trailer, this may

prevent the BLIS cameras from detect-

ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.

How BLIS functions in daylight and

darkness

Daylight

BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-

cles. The system is designed to help detect

motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,

motorcycles, etc.

Darkness

BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding

vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a

vehicle in the blind area must have its head-

lights on. This means, for example, that the

system will not detect a trailer without head-

lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

•BLIS does not react to cyclists or

mopeds.

•BLIS does not react to vehicles that are

standing still.

•The BLIS cameras have the same limi-

tation as the human eye. In other words,

their "vision is impaired" by adverse

weather conditions such as heavy

snowfall, intense light directly into the

camera, dense fog, etc.

Limitations

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)

may illuminate even when there are no other

vehicles in the area monitored by the system.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-

sionally even when there are no other vehi-

cles in the blind area, this does not indicate

a fault in the system.

In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.

Service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situa-

tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may

illuminate even when there are no other vehi-

cles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,

smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on

a highway

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low

on the horizon

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses

In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera

lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped

clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

CAUTION

•Clean the lenses carefully to avoid

scratching.

•The lenses are electrically heated to

help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-

tly brush away snow from the lenses.

Switching BLIS on and off

BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-

tion is switched on. The indicator lights will

provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

•The system can be switched off by press-

ing the BLIS button in the center console

(see the illustration). The indicator light in

the button goes out when the system is

switched off, and a text message is dis-

played.

•BLIS can be switched on again by pressing

the button. The indicator light in the button

will illuminate and a new text message will

be displayed. Press the READ button (see

page 126) to erase the message.

Depending on the vehicle's optional equip-

ment, there may not be space for the BLIS but-

ton in the center console. In this case, BLIS can

be switched on and off in the menu system by

pressing MY CAR and going to Settings

Car settings BLIS. See page 129 for a

description of the menu system.

BLIS system messages

Text in the dis-

play

System status

Blind spot syst.

Service required

BLIS not functioning

properly. Contact an

authorized Volvo

service technician.

Blind spot syst.

camera blocked

BLIS camera

obscured. Clean the

lenses.

Blind-spot info

system ON

BLIS system on

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Text in the dis-

play

System status

Blind-spot info

system OFF

BLIS system off

Blind spot syst.

Reduced function

The BLIS cameras'

function has been

reduced due to

weak or impaired

data transfer

between the BLIS

system's cameras

and the vehicle's

electrical system.

The cameras will

reset themselves

when this data

transfer has

returned to normal.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

193

Storage spaces

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of the

front seat cushions

Glove compartment

Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and

AUX input/USB connector*

Jacket holder

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Jacket holder

The jacket hanger is located on the inboard

side of the front passenger's seat head

restraint. It is only intended for hanging light

garments.

Tunnel console

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under

armrest, AUX input/USB connector.

Includes cup holder for driver and passen-

ger, 12-volt socket and small storage com-

partment.

Glove compartment

The owner's manual and maps can be kept

here. There are also holders for pens and fuel

cards. The glove compartment can be locked

manually with the key blade, see page 67.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195

Vanity mirror

G021438

Vanity mirror with lighting

The light comes on automatically when the

cover is lifted.

12-volt sockets

G031435

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

G021440

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt

accessories such as cell phone chargers and

coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

ignition must be in at least mode I, see

page 81.

The maximum current consumption is 10A

(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the

passenger compartment is in use. If both the

front and rear sockets are used at the same

time, the maximum current consumption per

socket is 7.5A (90W).

The auxiliary sockets can also be used to

power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette

lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from

your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Always keep the sockets covered when not

in use.

12-volt socket in the cargo area*

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

196

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket.

NOTE

The 12-volt socket in the cargo area pro-

vides electrical current even when the igni-

tion is switched off. Using the socket while

the engine is not running will drain the bat-

tery.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

197

198

Introduction........................................................................................... 200

Getting started ..................................................................................... 202

General infotainment functions ............................................................ 207

Radio..................................................................................................... 210

Media player......................................................................................... 219

AUX/USB sockets................................................................................. 223

Bluetooth media ................................................................................. 226

Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...................................................... 229

Cell phone voice control....................................................................... 237

Infotainment system menus ................................................................. 241

INFOTAINMENT

05 Infotainment

Introduction

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information

The infotainment system in your vehicle is

available in two versions:

High Performance Multimedia

•7" color TFT display

•Voice control1

•Thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad

•AM/FM/HD radio2

•Sirius satellite radio*

•CD/DVD (mp3 and wma file formats)

•AUX and USB sockets

•Bluetooth hands-free/streaming

•8 speakers

•4x40W amplifier

Premium Sound Multimedia

•7" color TFT display

•Voice control1

•Thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad

•AM/FM/HD radio2

•Sirius satellite radio*

•CD/DVD (mp3 and wma file formats)

•AUX and USB sockets

•Bluetooth hands-free/streaming

•12 speakers

•5x130W amplifier

Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes stereo

sound's two channels to the left/right and front/

rear speakers.

Dolby Pro Logic II and the symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation. The Dolby Pro Logic II System is

manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Audyssey MultEQ

The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used

to optimize sound quality to help ensure a

world-class listening experience.

Using the infotainment system

If the infotainment system is on when the igni-

tion is switched off, it will come on automati-

cally the next time the ignition is put in mode I

or higher and continue using the same source

(FM1, etc.) that was in use when the ignition

was switched off (the driver's door must also

be closed on vehicles with the optional keyless

drive).

The infotainment system can be operated with-

out a key in the ignition slot for 15 minutes at

a time by pressing the On/Off button.

1Only available on models equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System.

2U.S. models only

3Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

05 Infotainment

Introduction

201

While the engine is being started, the infotain-

ment system will be temporarily interrupted

and will resume when the engine has started.

NOTE

To help avoid excessive battery drain,

remove the remote key from the ignition slot

if the infotainment system is used while the

engine is switched off.

05 Infotainment

Getting started

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Infotainment system overview

Sockets for external audio sources (AUX

and USB)

Steering wheel keypad

7" display

Center console control panel

Operating the system

Short press: switch the system ON. Press

and hold: switch the system OFF.

Infotainment system mode buttons

(RADIO, MEDIA, or TEL). Press a button

to access the desired mode and press the

same button again to access the mode's

menus. Release the button and wait sev-

eral seconds to automatically accept your

selection. You can also navigate in the

menus by turning TUNE to make a selec-

tion and pressing OK/MENU to confirm

your selection.

Turn TUNE to navigate among the menu

alternatives in the display (FM1, DISC,

etc.), or to quickly scroll among tracks,

folders or radio stations.

Infotainment mode buttons

Press a button to select a mode

RADIO: use to select AM, FM1, FM2,

SAT1*1, SAT2*1

MEDIA: use to select DISC, AUX, USB,

iPod or Bluetooth*.

TEL: Bluetooth® hands-free cell phone

operation

MY CAR – See page 128.

1Sirius Satellite radio

05 Infotainment

Getting started

203

Basic infotainment functions

Controls in the center console for basic infotain-

ment functions

SOUND: press this button to access the

menu for adjusting bass, treble, etc. See

page 208 for additional information.

VOL: Turn to raise or lower the volume

level.

Short press: switch the system ON.

Press and hold: switch the system OFF. A

short press when the infotainment system

is on will mute/unmute the infotainment

system sound.

Number key pad (used to e.g., select a pre-

set radio station, enter letter/numbers

when using a Bluetooth cell phone, etc.

TUNE: Turn in either direction to manually

tune a radio station or navigate among the

menu alternatives shown on the display.

OK/MENU: Press to confirm a selection or

access the menus for the currently

selected infotainment system mode (you

can also choose to wait several seconds to

automatically accept your selection).

EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, inter-

rupt the current function, reject an incom-

ing phone call or erase any characters

entered in the display. From the highest

level in the current menu, press and hold to

go to the infortainment system's main

menu view (see page 204).

INFO: Press this button to display addi-

tional information about a function, song,

etc. See page 207 for more information.

FAV: This button can be used to store a

shortcut to a commonly used function in

AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the sec-

tion "FAV—storing a shortcut" on page

207 for information on using this button.

Views in the display

General information

The infotainment system displays information

in four different views. The highest (most gen-

eral) level is called the main view and is com-

mon to all system modes (RADIO, MEDIA,

TEL). Each mode has three different basic

views:

•Normal view: the default view for that par-

ticular mode

•Quick scroll view: the view displayed when

TUNE is turned, which allows you to e.g.,

change tracks on a CD, change radio sta-

tions, etc.

•Menu view: a view for navigating and mak-

ing selections in the mode's menu system.

The views in the different modes vary depend-

ing on the mode selected, the vehicle's equip-

ment, current settings, etc.

05 Infotainment

Getting started

204

Example of RADIO mode's normal view

Example of RADIO mode's quick scroll view

Example of Bluetooth



hands-free mode's menu

view

Main view

Example of RADIO mode's main view

Modes (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA etc.), see the

following table.

Source menu, e.g., (FM1, DISC, etc.).

Press and hold EXIT on the steering wheel

keypad to display the main view (see the illus-

tration). This offers a quick way of changing

modes (RADIO, MEDIA etc.) directly from the

steering wheel keypad without taking your

hands off the steering wheel. This can also be

done using the mode buttons on the center

console control panel.

•Select a mode (1) by turning the thumb

wheel on the steering wheel keypad. Press

the thumb wheel to confirm your choice.

•After selecting a mode, turn the thumb

wheel to one of the mode's alternatives in

05 Infotainment

Getting started

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205

the display (2) (for example, FM1) and

press the thumb wheel to confirm your

choice.

Press and hold EXIT to go back.

NAV: Navigation system*

RADIO: Radio

MEDIA: Media (DISC, USB, etc.)

TEL: Bluetooth hands-free

MY CAR: Driving-related settings

CAM: Park assist camera*

Steering wheel keypad

Standard steering wheel keypad

Left/right arrow keys: A short press moves

between tracks on a disc or searches for

the next radio station. Press and hold to

search within tracks.

Volume

EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, inter-

rupt the current function, reject an incom-

ing phone call or erase any characters

entered in the display. Press and hold to go

to the highest level in the current menu.

From the highest level in the current menu,

press and hold to go to the infortainment

system's main menu view (see page 204).

Thumb wheel, used to scroll in the menus

shown on the display. Press the thumb

wheel to e.g., confirm a menu selection or

to answer an incoming call on a Bluetooth-

connected cell phone.

Mute

Steering wheel keypad with voice control button2

Left/right arrow keys: A short press moves

between tracks on a disc or searches for

the next radio station. Press and hold to

search within tracks.

Volume

EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, inter-

rupt the current function, reject an incom-

ing phone call or erase any characters

entered in the display. A long press takes

2Models equipped with the optional navigation system only

05 Infotainment

Getting started

206

you to the main menu view (see

page 204).

Thumb wheel, used to scroll in the menus

shown on the display. Press the thumb

wheel to e.g., confirm a menu selection or

to answer an incoming call on a Bluetooth-

connected cell phone.

Voice control (for operating Bluetooth-

connected cell phones and the optional

navigation system)

05 Infotainment

General infotainment functions

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207

FAV—storing a shortcut

The FAV button can be used to store frequently

used functions, making it possible to start the

stored function by simply pressing FAV. One

favorite (for example, Equalizer) can be pro-

grammed for each of the following infotainment

system functions:

In RADIO mode

•AM

•FM1/FM2

•SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2*

In MEDIA mode

•DISC

•USB

•iPod

•Bluetooth*

•AUX

Favorites can also be stored for TEL, MY

CAR, CAM* and NAV*. See page 128 for a

description of the menu system.

To program a function on the FAV button:

1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).

2. Select a waveband or function (AM, Disc,

etc.).

3. Press and hold FAV until the mode/func-

tion's "favorite" menu is displayed.

4. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of

alternatives displayed and press OK/

MENU to confirm (store) your choice.

> The next time the infotainment system

mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is selected,

a short press on FAV will start the

stored function.

INFO—displaying additional

information

In certain cases, more information may be

available (about a radio station, song, artist,

etc.) than is currently displayed on the screen.

Press the INFO button to display all of the

available information.

05 Infotainment

General infotainment functions

208

Basic sound settings

Press SOUND to display the basic sound set-

ting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue press-

ing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the other

setting alternatives.

Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save

the new setting by pressing OK/MENU.

Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to

display:

•Surround:1 Can be set to On or Off. When

switched on, the system will automatically

select settings for the best sound quality,

which is normally DPLII and will

appear in the display. If the recording was

made using Dolby Digital technology, play-

back will be provided with this setting and

will appear in the display. If Sur-

round is switched off, audio will be provi-

ded using 3 channel stereo.

•Bass: Bass level.

•Treble: Treble level.

•Fader: Balance between the front and rear

speakers.

•Balance: Balance between the right and

left speakers.

•Center level1: Volume for the center

speaker.

•Surround level1 (only when Surround is

on): Surround level.

Advanced sound settings

Equalizer

Sound levels for different frequencies can be

adjusted separately using this feature.

To do so:

1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio

settings and select Equalizer

2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies

and press OK/MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting and

confirm the change by pressing OK/

MENU. Do the same for the other frequen-

cies.

4. When you have finished making your set-

tings, turn TUNE to move the marker to the

OK box and press OK/MENU or EXIT to

save the new settings.

Sound stage

The sound experience can be optimized for the

driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.

If the front and rear seats are occupied, the

sound stage setting Front seats is recom-

mended. Select one of the options under

Audio settings Sound stage.

Audio volume and automatic volume

control

The infotainment system compensates for dis-

rupting noises in the passenger compartment

by increasing the volume according to the

speed of the vehicle. The level of sound com-

pensation can be set at low, medium, high or

off. Select the level under Audio settings

Volume compensation.

External audio source volume

If an external devices such as an MP3 player or

an iPod  is connected to the AUX socket, the

device's volume may be different from the vol-

ume of the internal sound sources such as the

disc player or the radio. If the external sound

source's volume is too high, the quality of the

sound may be impaired. To help prevent this,

adjust the input volume of the external audio

source:

1Premium Sound Multimedia only

2Premium Sound Multimedia only

05 Infotainment

General infotainment functions

209

NOTE

Sound quality may be affected if the MP3

player is being charged while the system is

in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid

charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt socket

while it is being played.

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX.

Press OK/MENU or wait for several sec-

onds.

2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX

input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume.

Optimal sound reproduction

The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimal

sound reproduction using digital signal pro-

cessing.

This calibration takes into account factors such

as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the

listeners' seating positions, etc., for each com-

bination of vehicle/infotainment system.

There is also a dynamic calibration that takes

into consideration the volume level, radio

reception, and the speed of the vehicle.

The settings that are described in this manual,

(Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only

intended to enable the user to adapt sound

reproduction to his/her personal tastes.

05 Infotainment

Radio

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General functions

RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1,

FM2, Sirius1* or Sirius2* wavebands.

Number key buttons (0-9)

Navigate among the menu alternatives in

the display by turning TUNE.

Confirm your selection or access the radio

menus by pressing OK/MENU.

Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to go

to the next available station, press briefly

to tune to a preset station.

RADIO menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad.

See page 241 for more information about the

infotainment menu system.

Selecting a station (in wavebands AM/

FM1/FM2)

Automatic tuning

1. Press RADIO. Continue pressing this but-

ton to toggle to the desired waveband

(AM, FM1, etc.).

2. Release the button and wait several sec-

onds or press OK/MENU.

3. Press the left or right arrow keys on the

center console control panel to search for

the next available station.

List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2

only)

The radio automatically compiles a list of the

strongest FM stations whose signals are cur-

rently being received. This enables you to find

stations when driving in areas where radio sta-

tions and their frequencies are unfamiliar.

To access this list:

1. Select the desired waveband (FM1or

FM2).

2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.

This displays the list of stations in the area.

The currently tuned station will be indi-

cated in the list by magnified text.

3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to

select a station on the list.

NOTE

•This list will only display the frequencies

of the stations currently being received,

not a complete list of all radio frequen-

cies on the currently selected wave-

band.

•If the signal from the currently tuned

station is weak, this may prevent the

radio from updating the list of stations.

If this occurs, press while the list

of stations is displayed to switch to

manual tuning mode and select a sta-

tion. If the list of stations is no longer

displayed, turn TUNE in either direction

to display the list again and press

The list will disappear from the display after

several seconds.

If the station list is no longer displayed, turn

TUNE in either direction and press on the

number key pad on the center console to

switch to manual tuning (or to switch back from

manual tuning to the "list of stations" function).

Manual tuning

By default, the list of stations of the strongest

stations in the area will be displayed when you

turn TUNE (see the preceding section, "List of

stations"). While the list of stations is displayed,

05 Infotainment

Radio

211

press on the number key pad on the cen-

ter console to switch to manual tuning, which

enables you to select a frequency from the

complete list of all radio frequencies available

on the currently selected waveband. In other

words, in manual tuning mode, turning TUNE

one step will change from e.g., 93.3 to 93.5,

etc.).

To manually tune a station:

1. Press RADIO. Continue pressing this but-

ton to toggle to the desired waveband

(AM, FM1, etc.) and wait for several sec-

onds or press OK/MENU to confirm.

2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency

NOTE

The radio is initially set to automatically

search for stations in the area in which you

are driving (see the preceding section, "List

of stations").

However, if you have switched to manual

tuning (by pressing on the number key

pad on the center console while the list of

stations is displayed), the radio will remain

in manual tuning mode the next time it is

switched on. To switch back to "list of sta-

tions" mode, turn TUNE one step (to display

the full list of stations) and press .

Please note that if you press when the

list of stations is not displayed, this will acti-

vate the INFO function (see page 207 for

more information about this function).

Storing preset stations

Ten preset stations can be stored for each

waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).

Stored preset stations are selected using the

number key buttons on the center console.

Manually storing preset stations

1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a sta-

tion").

2. Hold in one of the number key buttons.

> The sound will be muted for several sec-

onds and when it returns, the station has

been stored on the number key button

used.

A list of preset stations can be displayed. This

function can be activated/deactivated in AM/

FM mode in FM menu Show presets or in

AM menu Show presets

Scan

The function automatically searches the cur-

rent waveband for radio stations. When a sta-

tion is found, it is played for several seconds

before scanning is resumed. While the station

is playing it can be stored as a preset in the

usual way (see "Manually storing preset sta-

tions").

To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to

FM menu Scan or in AM menu

Scan.

Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT.

NOTE

Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func-

tion.

Radio text

Some stations transmit information on pro-

gram content, artists, etc. This information can

be shown on the display.

05 Infotainment

Radio

212

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Radio

text.

HD Radio൅

൅

reception (U.S. models

only)

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio

broadcast

NOTE

HD radio volume may fade in and out at

times due to coverage limitations.

HD radio is a brand name registered by the

Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the

developer of a broadcasting technology called

IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to

the method of transmitting a digital radio

broadcast signal centered on the same fre-

quency as the AM or FM station's present fre-

quency.

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"

since it is both analogue and digital. During

hybrid operation, receivers still continue to

receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD

radio receivers incorporate both modes of

reception, where the receiver will automatically

switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal

cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.

When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,

the symbol will appear in the audio sys-

tem display. They symbol is "grayed-out" when

HD Radio is in standby mode and white when

the radio is actively receiving an HD broadcast.

More information about HD radio and IBOC

can be found on Ibiquity's website,

www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

•Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality

and AM as analogue FM).

•Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-

ber of listening choices through “multicast-

ing” (consisting of a frequency's main

channel and any sub-channels that may

also be available on that particular fre-

quency. See also the section "Sub-chan-

nels" below).

•When receiving a digital signal there is no

multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/

crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works

HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio

and broadcasts of this type are available in

many areas of the United States. However,

there are a few key differences:

•Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-

nal, stations send out a bundled signal –

both analogue and digital.

•An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-

ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending

on the terrain and location of the vehicle

(which will influence the signal strength),

the receiver will determine which signal to

receive.

Limitations

•Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM

only): The main channel is the only channel

that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig-

ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-

channels, they are broadcast in digital

mode only. The main FM channel will be

1HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity

Digital Corp.

05 Infotainment

Radio

213

displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC

(Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate

there are sub-channels available) The sub-

FM channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2

WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

•Reception coverage area: Due to current

IBOC transmitter power limitations, the

reception coverage area in digital mode is

somewhat more limited than the station's

analogue coverage area. Please be aware

that as with any radio broadcast technol-

ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and

building location can have positive or neg-

ative effects on radio reception.

•Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending will

occur as the signal strength reaches a pre-

set threshold in the receiver. This will be

noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak

reception) and is normal.

NOTE

There may be a noticeable difference in

sound quality when a change from analogue

to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such

as:

•Volume increase or decrease

•Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/

Treble cut or boost

•Time alignment (Digital program mate-

rial in extreme cases can be as much as

8 seconds behind the analogue). This

will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

The above items are dependant on the

broadcaster's equipment settings and do

not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio

receiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off

The factory setting for HD radio is on. However,

when driving through areas with weak HD sig-

nals (fringe areas), you may experience that the

radio repeatedly switches between analogue/

digital and digital/analogue reception. If this

happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.

To do so:

1. Be sure the audio system is switched on

and in one of the AM or FM modes.

2. Press OK/MENU in the center console

control panel.

3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD

Radio

4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will

disappear from the box on the display

screen).

This will disable the radio's capability to receive

digital broadcasts but it will continue to func-

tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM

receiver. Please note that when HD is switched

off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan-

nels (see the following section for a more

detailed explanation of sub-channels).

Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an X

will appear in the box on the display screen).

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

05 Infotainment

Radio

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM

wavebands only) will also have sub-channels

offering additional types of programming or

music.

In such cases, the “-” symbol will be displayed

to the left of the frequency number and a num-

ber will be displayed to the right of the fre-

quency number indicating that the currently

tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel.

The "2" in the illustration indicates that you are

currently listening to the first sub-channel on

frequency 93.9.

Selecting sub-channels

To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press

and hold the right arrow key on the center con-

sole or on the steering wheel keypad for

approximately 1 second. To go back to the

main channel, press and hold the left arrow key

on the center console or on the steering wheel

keypad for approximately 1 second. To go to

subchannel 2 (if available), press and hold the

right arrow key on the center console or on the

steering wheel keypad for approximately

1 second.

If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main

channel, pressing and holding the left arrow

key for approximately 1 second will tune to the

next lower radio frequency.

NOTE

•When the radio has gone into HD mode,

it may take several seconds before the

">" symbol (if the current frequency has

any sub-channels) is displayed to the

left of the frequency. Pressing and hold-

ing the arrow keys for approximately

1 second before the main-/sub-channel

icon is displayed will cause the radio to

tune to the next available radio station,

not to the current station's sub-chan-

nels.

•When you are no longer in broadcasting

range of the currently tuned sub-chan-

nel, No HD reception will be dis-

played. The radio will then be muted

and it will be necessary to tune to or

search for a new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,

see page 211 for information on storing sta-

tions.

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it

may take up to 6 seconds before the channel

becomes audible. If you press this button while

you are out of digital range of the transmitter,

No HD reception will be displayed.

Sirius satellite radio*

Listening to satellite radio

The Sirius satellite system consists of a number

of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous

orbit.

NOTE

•The digital signals from the Sirius satel-

lites are line-of-sight, which means that

physical obstructions such as bridges,

tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere

with signal reception.

•Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-

lic objects transported on roof racks or

in a ski box, or other antennas that may

impede signals from the SIRIUS satel-

lites.

Selecting Sirius radio mode

1. With the infotainment system switched on,

press RADIO.

2. Continue pressing RADIO (or turn TUNE to

scroll) to select SAT 1 or SAT 2 and press

OK/MENU (or wait for several seconds).

Activating Sirius radio

1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no

audio, which means that the channel is

unsubscribed and the text Subscription

05 Infotainment

Radio

215

update is needed is displayed (see also

"Selecting a channel").

2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).

3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel, the

Sirius ID will be displayed. The Sirius ID can

also be accessed from the menu (press

OK/MENU, turn TUNE to scroll to the

Advanced settings menu, press OK/

MENU, scroll to Sirius ID and press OK/

MENU to display the number).

4. Updating subscription will be displayed

while the subscription is being updated,

after which the display will return to the

normal view.

SIRIUS ID

The SIRIUS ID (sometimes referred to as the

Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is required

when contacting the Sirius Call Center. It is

used to activate your account and when mak-

ing any account transactions.

Selecting a channel category

1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels.

2. Press EXIT.

3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of cat-

egories and press OK/MENU to make a

selection.

> The channels in the selected category

are displayed.

NOTE

•The category ALL is default, which ena-

bles you to scroll through the entire list

of available satellite channels.

•The channel categories are automati-

cally updated several times a year. This

takes approximately two minutes and

will interrupt normal broadcasting. A

message will be displayed while updat-

ing is in progress. Information on chan-

nel or feature updates is available at

www.sirius.com.

Selecting a channel

There are three ways of tuning in a channel:

•Using the left and right arrow keys to go to

the next channel. Skipped channels (see

page 217) will be excluded.

•By turning the TUNE control and selecting

a channel from the list

•Through direct channel entry.

NOTE

•The numbers of skipped or locked

channels will not be displayed.

•If a channel is locked, the access code

must be entered before the channel can

be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"

on page 217.

Direct channel entry

The Sirius satellite channels are in numerical

order throughout all of the categories. To

access a channel directly:

1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list.

2. Use the number key buttons to enter the

channel's number.

3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to this

channel, even if it belongs to a category

other than the currently selected one.

Scanning

SCAN automatically searches through the list

of satellite channels. The search will only be

carried out in the selected category, see

page 211 for more detailed information on the

scan function.

Storing a channel

A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;

10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2, see

05 Infotainment

Radio

216

page 211 for detailed information on storing

channels.

•A long press on one of the number keys

stores the currently tuned channel on that

key.

•A short press on a number key while the

radio is in SAT 1 or SAT 2 mode will tune

to the preset satellite channel stored on

that button, regardless of the currently

selected channel category.

Searching for and storing songs

The Song seek function provides notification

when Sirius is broadcasting the songs selected

in song memory. Song memory enables you

to store the name of the song for future

advance notification when that song is being

played.

Song seek

When a satellite radio channel plays one of the

songs stored in the song memory while the

Song seek feature is activated, the listener will

be alerted by a text message and an audible

signal.

Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT

to cancel.

To activate/deactivate the song seek function:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory and

press OK/MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song seek and

press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate

the function.

NOTE

When the song has ended, the radio will

remain tuned to the channel on which the

song was played.

Song memory

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's

memory.

To add the currently playing song to the list:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/

MENU.

3. Scroll to Add song to memory and press

OK/MENU.

If a new song is selected when the memory is

full, you will be prompted to delete a song from

the list. To do so:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of

songs. Select a song and press OK/

MENU to delete it from the list.

Radio text

This text provides information about the song

that is currently playing. To turn this feature on

or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to Show

radio text and press OK/MENU to toggle

between on or off.

Advanced Sirius settings

This menu function enables you to make set-

tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.

To access this menu:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu

and press OK/MENU.

WARNING

Settings should be made when the vehicle

is at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the Sir-

ius menu:

•Channel skip settings can be made

•Channel lock settings can be made

•The channel access code can be displayed

or changed (see also "Locking a channel"

on page 217)

•Your Sirius ID can be displayed

•Reset Sirius settings

05 Infotainment

Radio

217

Skip options

This function is used to remove a channel from

the list of available channels.

Skipping a channel

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.

3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip

options menu.

4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip

list.

5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories

or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and

press OK/MENU to select it.

6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all

channels in the highlighted category or

turn TUNE to scroll to a channel and press

OK/MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple

channels can be selected.

Unskip all channels

This removes all channels from the skip list and

makes them available for selection.

Temporary unskip all channels

This function will temporarily unskip all chan-

nels and make them available for selection. The

channels remain on the skip list and will again

be skipped the next time the ignition is

switched on.

Channel lock

Access to specific channels can be restricted

(locked). A locked channel will not provide

audio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

All channels are initially unlocked.

Locking a channel

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.

3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll

to the Lock options menu and press OK/

MENU.

4. Use the number keys in the central control

panel to enter the channel access code2

and press OK/MENU.

5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel

lock list.

6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories

or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and

press OK/MENU to select it.

7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all

channels in the category or turn TUNE

to scroll to a channel and press OK/

MENU to select it. Multiple channels can

be selected.

The selected channel is now locked and a

checked box will be displayed to indicate this.

It will be necessary to enter the channel access

code2 in order to listen to a locked channel.

Unlocking a channel

A channel's access code2 is required to unlock

a channel.

Unlock all channels

This permanently removes all channels from

the locked list and makes them available for

selection.

Temp. unlock all channels

This function will temporarily unlock all chan-

nels and make them available for selection. The

channels remain on the locked list and will

again be locked the next time the ignition is

switched on.

CHANGE CODE

This function makes it possible to change the

channel access code. The default code is

0000.

To change the code:

2The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

05 Infotainment

Radio

218

1. Select Change code in the Lock

options menu and press OK/MENU.

2. Enter the new code and press OK/MENU.

3. Confirm the new code and press OK/

MENU.

If an incorrect code is entered, the text

Incorrect code is displayed.

If you have forgotten the access code:

1. Select Sirius ID in the Advanced

settings menu and press OK/MENU.

2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for

several seconds.

3. The current code will be displayed.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with

assistance.

SIRIUS ID

This function displays the 12-digit Sirius acti-

vation ID.

05 Infotainment

Media player

219

CD/DVD functions

Center console control panel

Disc slot

MEDIA button

Eject

Number keys

TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu

selections/folders/tracks.

OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec-

tion or access the menus for the currently

selected source (e.g., DISC).Left/right

arrow keys: Fast back/forward and change

track or chapter1.

Forward/back and change tracks or chap-

ter1.

The media player supports and can play the

following main types of discs and files:

•Purchased CDs (CD Audio)

•Home-burned CDs with audio and /or

video files

•Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or

video files

•Purchased DVDs

See page 222 for a list of compatible formats.

Media menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad.

See page 241 for more information about the

infotainment menu system.

Playing a disc

Press MEDIA several times until DISC is dis-

played. Release the button and wait several

seconds or press OK/MENU. If there is a disc

in the player, it will begin playing automatically.

Otherwise, Insert Disc will be displayed. Insert

the disc into the slot with the text side upward

and it will begin playing automatically.

If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its

folder structure will be read by the system. It

may take several seconds until the disc begins

playing, depending on its quality and the

amount of information it contains.

Disc eject

For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc

must be removed within 12 seconds or it will

be automatically drawn back into the slot.

Pause

When the audio system volume is turned off

completely, the player will pause and will

resume playing when the volume is turned up

again.

Navigating a disc and playing tracks

CD audio discs

Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to

navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con-

firm a choice and begin listening. Press EXIT

to cancel.

The / buttons on the center console or

steering wheel keypad can also be used to

change tracks.

Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files

Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to

navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con-

firm a choice and begin listening. Use EXIT to

stop or to go back in the disc's folder structure.

1DVDs only

05 Infotainment

Media player

220

The / buttons on the center console or

steering wheel keypad can also be used to

change audio/video files.

The following symbols are used in the display:

•- audio files

•- video files

•- folders

When a file has been played, the player will

continue to play the rest of the files (of the same

type) in the current folder. When all of the files

in the folder have been played, the player will

automatically go to the next folder and play the

files in it (unless Repeat folder is activated).

The system automatically detects and changes

settings if a disc containing only audio or only

video files is inserted in the player and will play

these files. However, the system will not

change settings if a disc containing both audio

and video files is inserted and the player will

continue to play the current type of file.

NOTE

Video images will only be visible when the

vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is

traveling faster than approximately 4 mph

(6 km/h), No visual media available while

driving will be displayed. Sound from the

film will still be audible and video images will

be shown again when the vehicle stops.

NOTE

Some copy protected audio files or home-

burned audio files may not be read by the

player.

DVD videos

See page 221 for information.

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the / buttons to fast

forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for

audio files but several speeds can be chosen

for video files. Press the / buttons sev-

eral times to increase the speed. Release the

button to return to normal viewing speed.

Gracenote



track identification

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional nav-

igation system, this system uses a hard drive

containing a database that recognizes music

on audio CDs. The database contains songs

that are currently popular. If the media player

finds a track in the database, the album title

and artist's name are displayed, and the title,

artist and album for each song is also dis-

played. If the current audio CD is not found in

the database, CD text from the disc is used. If

no CD text is available, only track 1, track 2,

etc., will be displayed.

Scan

This function plays the first ten seconds of

each track/audio file. To start scanning:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to Scan.

> The first ten seconds of each track/

audio file will be played.

3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The cur-

rent track/audio file will continue playing.

Random

This function plays the tracks in random order

(shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be

scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to

tracks in random order:

1. Press OK/MENU,

2. Turn TUNE to Random

2Not video DVDs

05 Infotainment

Media player

221

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate

the random play function.

Press the / buttons on the center con-

sole or steering wheel keypad to change

tracks/audio files.

Repeat folder

This function makes it possible to play files in

a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been

played, the first file will begin again. To acti-

vate:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder.

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate

the function.

Playing video DVDs

Play

When playing a video DVD, a disk menu may

appear on the display, giving you access to

extra functions and settings such as choice of

subtitle and language, scene selection, etc.

NOTE

Video images will only be visible when the

vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is

traveling faster than approximately 4 mph

(6 km/h), No visual media available while

driving will be displayed. Sound from the

film will still be audible and video images will

be shown again when the vehicle stops.

Navigating in a DVD's menus

Buttons in the center console control panel,

shown above, are used to navigate in a DVD's

menus.

Changing chapters or titles

Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and

navigate among them (if a film is playing, it will

be paused). Press OK/MENU to select a chap-

ter and return to the normal view. If a film was

playing, it will resume). Press EXIT to access

the list of titles.

Turn TUNE to select a title and press OK/

MENU to confirm and return to the list of chap-

ters. Press EXIT to cancel and return to the

normal view (without having made a selection).

Changing chapters or title

TurnTUNE to access the list of chapters and

navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is

currently playing). Press OK/MENU to choose

a chapter and return to the normal view in the

display (if a film was playing, it will resume).

Press EXIT to access the list of titles.

In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a selec-

tion and press OK/MENU to confirm. This also

returns you to the list of chapters. Press EXIT

to cancel and return to the normal view (without

having made a selection).

It is also possible to change chapters by press-

ing / on the center console control

panel or on the steering wheel keypad.

Advanced settings

Angle

If the DVD supports this function, it is possible

to select a camera angle for a certain scene.

3Home-burned discs/USB only

05 Infotainment

Media player

222

This can be done in DVD mode under Disc

menu Advanced settings Angle.

DivX



Video On Demand

The media player can be registered to play

DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or

USB. The registration code can be found by

pressing the MY CAR button, and going to

Settings Information DivX® VOD

code. See page 128 for more information

about the menu system.

See also www.divx.com/vod for more informa-

tion.

Screen settings

Screen settings can be made (when the vehicle

is not moving) for:

•Brightness

•Contrast

1. PressOK/MENU and choose Screen

Settings and confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and

press OK/MENU.

3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and

confirm the change by pressing OK/

MENU.

Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the

screen settings list.

To return to the factory settings, select

Reset .

Compatible formats

The media player can play a number of differ-

ent types of files and disc formats, and is com-

patible with the formats listed in the following

table.

NOTE

Dual format (double-sided discs) such as

DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than nor-

mal discs and may not play in your infotain-

ment system.

If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3

tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be

ignored.

Audio

formats

CD-Audio, mp3, wma,

aac, m4a

Video for-

mats

CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx,

avi, asf

05 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

223

Connecting external devices

Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage com-

partment between the front seats

An auxiliary device, such as an iPod or MP3

player can be connected to the audio system

via one of the sockets in the center console

storage compartment. A device connected to

the USB socket can be operated using the

vehicle's infotainment system controls.

An iPod or an MP3 player with rechargeable

batteries will also be charged if the device is

connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's

ignition is on or if the engine is running).

To connect a device:

1. Press MEDIA several times to come to the

desired source (iPod, USB or AUX).

Release the button and wait for several

seconds or press OK/MENU.

> For example, if a USB device has been

selected, the text Connect USB will be

displayed.

2. Connect the device to one of the sockets

in the center console storage compartment

(see the illustration).

The text Reading USB will be displayed while

the system reads the device's folders. This may

take a short time, depending on the folder

structure and the number of files.

When this information has been loaded, track

information will be displayed and a track can

be selected.

Tracks can be selected in two ways:

•Turn TUNE and press OK/MENU

•Use the right or left arrow keys

( / ) on the center console control

panel or on the steering wheel keypad

NOTE

•The system supports a number of

iPod models produced in 2005 or later.

•In order to help avoid damage to the

USB socket, it will be switched off if

there is a short circuit or if the con-

nected device uses too much current

(which can happen if the device does

not comply with the USB standard). The

USB socket will reactivate the next time

the ignition is switched on if the problem

no longer exists. If the problem persists,

contact a trained and authorized Volvo

service technician.

MEDIA menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad.

See page 241 for more information about the

infotainment menu system.

Navigating and playing tracks

Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist and

to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to

either select a sub-folder or confirm a choice

and begin playback. Press EXIT to cancel and

exit the playlist or to go back in the folder struc-

ture.

1USB and iPod



only

05 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

224

The / buttons on the center console or

steering wheel keypad can also be used to

change tracks/files.

The following symbols are used in the display:

•- audio files

•- video files

•- folders

When a file has been played, the player will

continue to play the rest of the files (of the same

type) in the current folder. When all of the files

in the folder have been played, the player will

automatically go to the next folder1 (unless

Repeat folder is activated) and play the files

in it.

The system automatically detects and changes

settings if a device containing only audio or

only video files is connected to the USB socket

and will play these files. However, the system

will not change settings if the device contains

both audio and video files and will continue to

play the current type of file.

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the / buttons to fast

forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for

audio files but several speeds can be chosen

for video files. Press the / buttons sev-

eral times to increase the speed. Release the

button to return to normal viewing speed.

Scan

This function plays the first ten seconds of

each track/audio file. To start scanning:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to Scan.

> The first ten seconds of each track/

audio file will be played.

3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The cur-

rent track/audio file will continue playing.

Random

This function plays the tracks in random order

(shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be

scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to

tracks in random order:

1. Press OK/MENU,

2. Turn TUNE to Random

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate

the random play function.

Press the / buttons on the center con-

sole or steering wheel keypad to change

tracks/audio files.

Repeat

This function makes it possible to play files in

a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been

played, the first file will begin again. To acti-

vate:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder.

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate

the function.

External sound sources

USB flash drive

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is

advisable to only store music files on the drive.

It will take considerably longer for the system

to index the files on the drive if it contains any-

thing other than compatible music files.

1USB and iPod only

2USB only

05 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

225

NOTE

•The system supports removable media

that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the

FAT32 file system. It can index up to

1,000 folders and a maximum of 254

sub-folders/files for each folder. How-

ever, the highest folder level can sup-

port up to 1,000 sub-folders/files.

•When using a longer type of USB

device, connecting it with a USB

adapter cable will help reduce mechan-

ical wear on the USB socket and on the

device.

USB hub

A USB hub can be connected to the USB

socket, making it possible to connect several

USB devices at the same time. To select one

of the devices, go to the menu USB menu

Select USB device

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have a file indexing system

that is not supported by the vehicle's audio

system. In order to use an MP3 player, the sys-

tem must be set to USB Removable device/

Mass Storage Device.

iPod



An iPod receives current and its battery is

charged through the USB cable.

The system will only play audio files from an

iPod.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as a sound source,

the vehicle's audio system has a menu

structure similar to the one in the iPod. See

the iPod's manual for detailed information.

Compatible file formats via the USB

socket

The following audio and video files are suppor-

ted by the system when playing a device con-

nected to the USB socket.

Audio formats mp3, wma, aac,

m4a

Video formats divx, avi, asf

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth



media

226

Streaming audio

Introduction

The vehicle's media player is equipped with

Bluetooth and can play streaming audio files

from a Bluetooth device such as a cell phone

or PDA. Navigation and control of the device

can be done through the vehicle's center con-

sole control panel or the steering wheel key-

pad. On certain external devices, it is also pos-

sible to change tracks from the device.

In order to listen streaming audio, the vehicle's

media player must first be put in Bluetooth

mode. To do so, Press MEDIA several times

until Bluetooth is displayed. Release the but-

ton and wait several seconds or press OK/

MENU.

Choices can be made in the Bluetooth menus

from the center console control panel or the

steering wheel keypad. See page 241 for addi-

tional information about navigating the various

menus.

NOTE

Any Bluetooth media players used must

support Audio/Video Remote Control Pro-

file (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribu-

tion Profile (A2DP). The player must use

AVRCP version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older

versions of these standards are used, cer-

tain features (e.g., scan or random) may not

function.

Not all cell phones or media players are fully

compatible with the vehicle's Bluetooth sys-

tem. A list of compatible devices is available

at you Volvo retailer or at www.volvo-

cars.us.

The vehicle's media player can only play audio

files through the Bluetooth function.

Overview

Center console control panel

VOL: Volume control

MEDIA button

TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu alter-

natives and folders shown in the display.

OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec-

tion or access the menus.

EXIT: Press to go back in the menu struc-

ture or cancel a function.

Left/right arrow keys: Short press: change

tracks. Long press: fast forward/reverse

within a track. The arrow keys on the steer-

ing wheel keypad can be used in the same

way.

MEDIA menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad.

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth



media

227

See page 241 for more information about the

infotainment menu system.

Pairing and connecting an external

device

Before an external device can be connected, it

must be paired to the infotainment system. The

procedure for connecting an external device

varies, depending whether or not the device

has previously been paired to the infotainment

system. A maximum of 10 external devices can

be paired and each device only needs to be

paired once. To pair a device:

1. Press MEDIA several times until

Bluetooth is displayed, release the button

and wait for several seconds or press OK/

MENU.

2. Press OK/MENU.

>When Add device is displayed, press

OK/MENU.

3. Be sure the external device's Bluetooth

function is turned on and that the device is

"discoverable." See the device's user's

guide if necessary.

4. Press OK/MENU.

> The infotainment system will search for

external devices that are in range, which

may take several minutes. The

Bluetooth-names of the devices found

will appear in the center console dis-

play.

5. Select the device to be paired and press

OK/MENU.

6. Using the external device’s keypad, enter

the digits shown in the audio system’s dis-

play and press the device's button used to

confirm a choice.

The external device will be automatically paired

and connected to the infotainment system.

Audio files can now be selected using the

/ buttons in the center console or on

the steering wheel keypad.

Automatic connection

When the Bluetooth function is active and the

most recently paired device is within range, it

is automatically connected. When the infotain-

ment system searches for the most recently

paired device, its name is shown in the display.

To connect another paired device, press

EXIT. See the following section for information

about switching to another device.

Switching to another device

It is possible to switch among paired

Bluetooth devices that are in the vehicle. To

do so:

1. Press MEDIA several times until

Bluetooth is displayed, release the button

and wait for several seconds or press OK/

MENU.

2. Be sure the external device's Bluetooth

function is turned on and that the device is

"discoverable." See the devices user's

guide if necessary.

3. Press OK/MENU.

4. Turn TUNE to Change Bluetooth

device and confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

> After a short time, the external device's

name will appear in the display. If other

devices that have been paired are in

range, their names will also be dis-

played.

5. Select the device to be connected by turn-

ing TUNE and pressing OK/MENU to con-

firm.

> The external device will be connected to

the infotainment system.

Audio files can now be selected using the

/ buttons in the center console or on

the steering wheel keypad.

Removing a paired device

1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU.

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth



media

228

2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth

device and press OK/MENU.

3. Select the device to be removed by turning

TUNE and confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

> A question asking if you would like to

remove the device will be displayed.

4. Press OK/MENU to confirm or EXIT to

cancel.

Disconnecting an external device

The external device is automatically discon-

nected from the audio system if it is moved out

of range.

Random

This function plays the audio files on the exter-

nal device in random order (shuffle). This func-

tion can be activated/deactivated under:

Bluetooth menu Random

Press the / buttons on the center con-

sole or steering wheel keypad to change

tracks.

Scanning audio files on an external

device

This function plays the first ten seconds of

each audio file. This function can be activated/

deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Scan.

Bluetooth



version information

This feature offers information about the

Bluetooth version installed in the vehicle's

infotainment system. This information can be

found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth

software version in car.

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

229

Introduction

System overview

Cell phone

Location of the microphone

Steering wheel keypad

Center console control panel and display

Bluetooth

hands-free

This feature makes it possible to set up a wire-

less connection between a Bluetooth-ena-

bled cell phone and the vehicle’s infotainment

system. This enables the infotainment system

to function as a hands-free connection and

allows you to remote-control a number of the

phone’s functions. The microphone used by

this system is located near the driver's side sun

visor (2). The buttons and other controls on the

cell phone can always be used regardless of

whether or not the phone is connected to the

hands-free system.

TEL menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad.

See page 241 for more information about the

infotainment menu system.

NOTE

Not all cell phones are fully compatible with

the hands-free system. A list of compatible

phones is available at your Volvo retailer or

at www.volvocars.us

WARNING

Never use the hands-free feature or any

other device in your vehicle in a way that

distracts you from the task of driving safely.

Distraction can lead to a serious accident.

Compliance

FCC/IC common sentence

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules

and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation of

this device.

USA: FCC ID A269ZUA130

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

IC RSS-Gen

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled

equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency

(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to

OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency

(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very

low levels of RF energy that it deemed to com-

ply without maximum permissive exposure

evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it

should be installed and operated with at least

8 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator

and person’s body (excluding extremities:

hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Canada: IC 700BIAM2101

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

230

Bluetooth® functions in the center

console control panel

Number keys containing letters and num-

bers for dialing numbers, adding phone

book entries, etc.

TEL: Press this button to activate/deacti-

vate the Bluetooth function.

TUNE: Turn to navigate among the menu

alternatives in the display.

OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming

call, confirm your selection or access the

phone menus. Incoming calls can also be

answered by pressing the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad.

EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase

characters that have been entered, end an

ongoing function. This function is also

available on the steering wheel keypad.

Getting started

Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad

and in the center console to access, navigate

and make selections in the hands-free sys-

tem’s menus.

Activating/deactivating

A short press on the TEL button in the center

console activates the hands-free system. The

symbol in the display indicates that the

hands-free system is active.

A long press on the TEL button deactivates the

hands-free system and disconnects the cell

phone.

Connecting cell phones

The procedure for connecting a cell phone var-

ies, depending on the phone itself and on

whether or not the phone has been previously

paired with the infotainment system (see page

227 for instructions on pairing an external

device).

There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to

the hands-free system for the first time:

Method 1: using the vehicle's menus

1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth func-

tion to make the phone discoverable (refer

to the phone’s owner’s manual if neces-

sary) or go to www.volvocars.com

2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth hands-

free system by briefly pressing the TEL

button. Continue by pressing OK/MENU.

3. Select Change phone and press OK/

MENU.

>Add phone will be displayed. If other

cell phones have already been paired

with the infotainment system, their

names will also be displayed. Press OK/

MENU.

4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode,

press OK/MENU.

> The infotainment system will search for

cell phones that are in range, which

takes approximately 30 seconds. Any

phones detected will be displayed with

their Bluetooth names. The hands-free

system’s Bluetooth name will appear in

the cell phone’s display as My Car.

5. Select one of the cell phones shown in the

center console display.

6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the

digits shown in the center console display

and press the button on the cell phone

used to confirm a choice.

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

231

Method 2: using the cell phone’s menus

1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly

pressing the TEL button in the center con-

sole. If there is a cell phone connected,

disconnect it from the hands-free system.

2. Make the vehicle discoverable via the

Bluetooth function by pressing OK/

MENU and activating the menu selection

Phone settings Discoverable.

3. Perform a search with the cell phone's

Bluetooth function (see the cell phone's

user's guide if necessary).

4. Select My Car in the list of devices shown

in the cell phone’s display.

5. When prompted, enter a PIN code of your

choice in the cell phone using the cell

phone's keypad. Enter the same PIN code

in the infotainment system using the sys-

tem's keypad in the center console.

6. Connect to My Car from the cell phone.

The cell phone will be paired (registered) and

will be connected automatically to the infotain-

ment system. For more information on pairing

and connecting a cell phone, see page 233.

Making a call

1. Ensure that is shown at the top of the

center console display and that the hands-

free function is in telephone mode.

2. Dial the desired phone number using the

center console keypad or use the speed

dial function (see page 236). In normal

view (see page 203 for information about

the various display views). It is also possi-

ble to turn TUNE clockwise to access the

phone book and then counter-clockwise

for the call list. See page 233 for more

information about the phone book.

3. Press OK/MENU

End or reject a call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone

The cell phone is automatically disconnected

from the infotainment system if it is moved out

of range.

The cell phone can be manually disconnected

from the hands-free system by pressing and

holding TEL or in phone mode, going to Phone

menu Phone off. See also page 233 for

more information about connections.

The hands-free system is also deactivated

when the ignition is switched off (or if the

driver’s door is opened on vehicles equipped

with the optional keyless drive).

When the cell phone is disconnected from the

hands-free system, a call in progress can be

continued using the cell phone’s own speaker

and microphone.

Even if the cell phone has been disconnected

manually, some phones may reconnect auto-

matically to the most recently used hands-free

unit, for example when a new call is initiated.

Handling calls

Incoming calls

Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad) to answer a

call, even if the infotainment system is cur-

rently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or

MEDIA).

Press EXIT to reject a call.

Automatic answer

This function means that incoming calls will be

answered automatically. Activate or deactivate

the function in the menu system under Phone

main menu Call options Auto answer.

Call settings

While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU or

the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad

to access the following functions:

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

232

•Mute: mute the infotainment system’s

microphone.

•Mobile phone: transfer the call from

hands-free to the cell phone. On certain

cell phones, the connection will be broken,

which is normal. The hands-free function

will ask if you would like to reconnect.

•Dial number: dial a third party during an

ongoing call using the number keys (the

current call will be put on hold).

Call lists

Call lists are copied to the hands-free function

each time a cell phone is connected and the

lists are updated while the phone is connected.

In normal view, turn TUNE counter-clockwise

to see the All calls list.

In phone mode, the various call lists can be

displayed in Phone main menu Call lists:

•All calls

•Missed calls

•Answered calls

•Dialed calls (certain cell phones show this

list in reverse order)

•Call duration

If no number has been stored, this menu can

be accessed by pressing and holding 1.

Voice mail

In normal view, a speed dial number for voice

mail can be programmed and accessed by

pressing and holding 1.

The number for voice mail can be changed in

phone mode in Phone main menu Call

options Voice mailbox no. Change

voicemail number.

Sound settings

Call volume

Call volume can be only be adjusted during a

call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel key-

pad or the infotainment system’s VOL control.

infotainment system volume

If no phone call is in progress, volume for the

infotainment system can be adjusted in the

normal way with the infotainment system's

VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad.

infotainment system sound can be automati-

cally muted when a phone call is received in

Phone main menu Phone settings

Sounds and volume Mute radio/media.

Ringing volume

In phone mode, go to Phone main menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring volume and adjust the volume by turning

VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT.

Ringing tones

The hands-free system’s integrated ringing

tones can be selected in Phone main menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc.

NOTE

The connected cell phone’s ring tone may

not be switched off when one of the hands-

free system's ringing tones is used.

If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s

ring tone1, go to Phone main menu Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

signals Mobile phone ring signal.

1Not supported by all cell phones.

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

233

More information about pairing and

connecting cell phones

A maximum of 10 cell phones can be paired

with the hands-free system. Pairing only needs

to be done once for each phone. After pairing,

the cell phone no longer needs to be in sight or

discoverable. Only one cell phone can be con-

nected to hands-free at a time.

Automatic connection

When the hands-free system is active and the

most recently connected cell phone is within

range, it is connected automatically. If this

phone is not within range, the hands-free sys-

tem will attempt to connect one of the other

paired cell phones. When the infotainment sys-

tem searches for the most recently connected

phone, this phone’s name appears in the dis-

play.

Manual connection

To connect a phone other than the one that

was most recently connected or to switch

between cell phones that are already paired

with the hands-free system, go to Phone main

menu Change phone.

Removing a paired phone from the list

In phone mode, a paired phone can be

removed from the list of phones in Phone main

menu Remove Bluetooth device.

Bluetooth



version

For information about the version of

Bluetooth installed in the vehicle, go to Phone

main menu Phone settings Bluetooth

software version in car.

Phone book

The hands-free system uses two phones

books (one with the cell phone's list of contacts

and one with contacts saved directly in the

infotainment system), which are combined to

form one phone book.

•The infotainment system downloads the

phone book from a connected cell phone.

This phone book will only be displayed

when this cell phone is connected to the

hands-free system.

•The infotainment system also has an inte-

grated phone book made up of contacts

that have been saved in the system,

regardless of which cell phone is currently

connected when the contact is saved.

These contacts will be displayed regard-

less of the cell phone that is connected. If

a contact has been saved in the infotain-

ment system, the symbol will be dis-

played next to it.

NOTE

Changes made from the infotainment sys-

tem to a contact in the cell phone's phone

book will result in a new contact being

added to the infotainment system's phone

book. However, this contact will not be

saved in the cell phone's phone book. The

infotainment system's display will show

duplicate contacts with different icons.

Please also note that if a speed dial number

is saved or if a contact's information is edi-

ted, this will result in a new contact in the

infotainment system's phone book.

The symbol must be displayed before

the phone book can be used and the hands-

free function must be in phone mode.

The infotainment system saves a copy of each

paired cell phone's phone book. This phone

book can be copied each time the phone is

connected.

Activate/deactivate this function in phone

mode in Phone main menu Phone

settings Download phone book.

If the phone book contains information about

someone who is trying to call you, this infor-

mation will be shown in the display.

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

234

Contact shortcuts

A quick way of searching the phone book for

contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE clock-

wise to access the phone book and then coun-

ter-clockwise to select a contact from the list.

Press OK/MENU to call.

Each name in the phone book has a default

phone number. If the symbol is displayed to

the right of it, this indicates that there are addi-

tional phone numbers for this contact. To use

a phone number other than the default one,

press the button on the center console

control panel. Turn TUNE to select a different

phone number and press OK/MENU to call.

It is also possible to search for a contact by

using the center console keypad to enter the

first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also the

following table "Buttons in the center console"

for each button's function).

The list of contacts can also be accessed from

normal view by pressing and holding the button

on the center console keypad with the first let-

ter of the contact's name. For example, press-

ing and holding button 6 would provide direct

access to the section of the list with contacts

whose names begin with M.

Buttons in the center console

Button Function

Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1

A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2

D E F È É 3

G H I Ì 4

J K L 5

M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6

P Q R S ß 7

T U V Ü Ù 8

W X Y Z 9

Shift between upper and lower

case

+ 0 p w

# *

Searching for contacts

Searching for contacts using the text wheel

List of characters

Switch between character entry modes

(see the following table)

Phone book (list of contacts)

To search for or edit a contact in phone mode,

go to Phone main menu Phone book

Search.

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter

keys on the center console can also be

used.

2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results

of the search will be displayed in the phone

book (3).

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

235

3. To switch from letter entry mode to the

entry mode for numbers or special charac-

ters, or to go to the phone book, turn

TUNE to one of the selections (see the

explanation in the following table) in the list

for switching character entry mode (2) and

press OK/MENU.

Character entry modes

123/

ABC

Toggle between letters and num-

bers by pressing OK/MENU.

More Switch to special characters by

pressing OK/MENU.

This leads to the phone book (3).

Turn TUNE to select a contact

and press OK/MENU to display

the contact's information.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character.

Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the char-

acters that have been entered.

If a number button on the center console is

pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a list

of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly press

the button once to enter its first letter, twice to

enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press

the button to display other characters. Con-

tinue with the next character, etc.

To enter a number, press and hold the button.

Adding a new contact

Enter the name of a new contact

Switch between character entry modes

(see the following table)

Character entry field

New contacts can be added in phone mode in

Phone main menu Phone book New

contact.

1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/

MENU to go to the character entry mode

(see the illustration).

2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter

keys on the center console can also be

used.

3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name

entered will be displayed in the character

entry field (2).

4. To switch from letter entry mode to the

entry mode for numbers or special charac-

ters, or to toggle between upper and lower

case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the

selections (see the explanation in the fol-

lowing table) in the list (1) and press OK/

MENU.

When you have finished entering the name,

select OK in the list in the display (1) and press

OK/MENU. Continue by entering the phone

number in the same way.

When you have entered the phone number,

press OK/MENU and select a tag for the num-

ber (Mobile phone, Home, Work or

General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.

When all of the contact's information has been

entered, press EXIT to save.

123/

ABC

Toggle between letters and num-

bers by pressing OK/MENU.

More Switch to special characters by

pressing OK/MENU.

OK Save and return to Add contact

by pressing OK/MENU.

05 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

236

Toggle between upper and lower

case letters by pressing OK/

MENU.

Press OK/MENU and the cursor

will move to the character entry

field (2) at the top of the display.

The cursor can now be moved by

turning TUNE to a position where

new characters can be entered

or deleted by pressing EXIT. In

order to add characters, return to

text entry mode by pressing OK/

MENU.

Speed dial

Speed dial numbers can be added in phone

mode in Phone main menu Phone book

Speed dial.

To use speed dial to make a call in phone

mode, press a button on the center console

keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact

has not been saved on the speed dial number

used, you will be prompted to save a contact

on the number selected.

Accept vCards

vCards from other cell phones can be added to

the infotainment system's phone book. To ena-

ble this feature, put the infotainment system in

discoverable mode for Bluetooth. The feature

is activated in Phone main menu Phone

book Receive vCard.

Memory status

In phone mode, the memory status of the info-

tainment system's phone book and the con-

nected cell phone's phone book can be seen

in Phone main menu Phone book

Memory status.

Clearing the phone book

In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment

system's phone book can be cleared in Phone

main menu Phone book Clear phone

book.

NOTE

Clearing the entries in the infotainment sys-

tem's phone book does not delete entries in

the cell phone's phone book.

05 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

237

Introduction

The infotainment system's voice control fea-

ture1 enables the driver to voice-activate cer-

tain functions in a Bluetooth-connected cell

phone or the navigation system.

NOTE

•The information in this section applies

to using voice commands to operate a

Bluetooth



-connected cell phone.

See also the section "Bluetooth

hands-free connection" beginning on

page 229 for detailed information about

using a cell phone with the vehicle's

infotainment system.

•The navigation system has a separate

user's guide containing information

about voice commands for operating

that system.

Voice commands offer convenience and help

avoid distractions so that you can concentrate

on driving and focus your attention on road and

traffic conditions.

WARNING

As the driver, you have full responsibility for

operating the vehicle safely and adhering to

all applicable traffic regulations.

The voice control feature provides access to a

number of functions in the Bluetooth hands-

free and navigation systems while allowing you

to keep your hands on the steering wheel. Input

is in dialogue form using spoken commands

from the user and verbal prompts from the sys-

tem. Voice control uses the same microphone

as the Bluetooth hands-free system (see the

illustration on page 229) and system prompts

are provided through the infotainment sys-

tem's front speakers.

Getting started

Voice control button on the steering wheel

Activating the system

Before any phone voice commands can be

used, a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must

be paired with the infotainment system. If a

phone command is given, the system will

inform you If there is no cell phone paired. See

page 230 for information on pairing a cell

phone.

Press the voice control button (1 in the illustra-

tion) to activate the system and initiate a com-

mand dialogue. The system will display com-

monly used commands on the screen when the

button has been pressed.

1Available in vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System only

05 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

238

While using the voice control system, keep the

following points in mind:

•When giving commands, speak at your

usual speed and in a normal tone of voice

after the tone

•The vehicle's doors, windows and moon-

roof should be closed when using the voice

control system

•Avoid background noises in the cabin

when using the system

NOTE

If you are uncertain of the commands that

you can use, saying "help" will prompt the

system to provide a number of commands

that can be used in a specific situation.

Voice control commands can be cancelled

by:

•Saying "cancel"

•Not speaking

•Pressing and holding the voice control

button

•Pressing EXIT or one of the mode but-

tons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).

Voice control support features

•Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint you

with the system and the procedure for giv-

ing commands.

•Training: A feature that enables the voice

control system to become familiar with

your voice and pronunciation, and allows

you to set up user profiles. Two user pro-

files can be voice trained.

These support features are accessed by press-

ing the MY CAR button in the center console

and turning TUNE to scroll to the desired menu

selection.

Tutorial

The tutorial feature can be started in two ways:

NOTE

The tutorial feature can only be started when

the vehicle is parked and the parking brake

is applied.

•By pressing the voice control button and

saying "Voice tutorial."

•By pressing MY CAR and going to

Settings Voice settings Voice

tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the

tutorial lesson.

The tutorial is divided into three lessons, which

take a total of approximately 5 minutes to com-

plete.

By default, the system will begin with the first

lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the

voice control button and say "next." Go back

to a previous lesson by saying "previous."

Press and hold the voice control button to exit

the tutorial.

Training

The system will display up to fifteen phrases for

you to say. To start the voice training proce-

dure, press MY CAR and go to Settings

Voice settings Voice training. Select User

1 or User 2 and press OK/MENU to begin.

After the training has been completed, remem-

ber to set your user profile in Voice user

setting.

Other voice control settings found in MY

CAR

•Voice user setting: Two user profiles can

be set by pressing MY CAR and going to

Settings Voice settings Voice user

setting. Select User 1 or User 2.

•Voice output volume: Press MY CAR and

go to Settings Voice settings Voice

output volume. Press OK/MENU and turn

TUNE to raise or lower the volume. Press

EXIT to save the change and exit the menu.

05 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

239

Using voice commands

The driver initiates a voice command dialogue

by pressing the voice control button (see the

illustration on page 237).

When a dialogue has been initiated, commonly

used commands will be shown in the display.

Grayed-out texts or texts in parentheses are

not part of the spoken command.

Once you become familiar with the system, you

can speed up the command dialogue by briefly

pressing the voice control button to skip

prompts from the system.

Commands can be given in several ways.

For example, the command "Phone call con-

tact" can be spoken as:

•"Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone," wait

for a system response, and then continue

by saying "Call contact."

•"Phone call contact"—give the entire com-

mand at one time

The following is a list of features that can be

voice-controlled with a Bluetooth-connected

cell phone.

Shortcuts

Shortcut commands for using the phone can

be found in the MY CAR menu system, under

Settings Voice settings Voice

command list Phone commands and

General commands. See page 128 for more

information on the menu system.

Dialing a number

The system understands the digits zero to nine.

These numbers can be spoken individually, in

groups of several digits at a time, or the entire

number can be given at once. Numbers above

nine will not be recognized.

The following is an example of a voice com-

mand dialogue. The system's response may

vary depending on the situation.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone > dial number

Phone dial number

System response

Number please

User action

Begin saying the digits in the phone number. If

you say several digits and pause, the system

will repeat them and prompt you by saying

"Continue."

Continue saying the digits. When you have fin-

ished, complete the command by saying

"Dial."

•You can also change the number by using

the commands "Correction" (which dele-

tes the last group of digits spoken) or

"Delete" (which will erase the entire phone

number).

Dialing from a call list

The dialogue below enables you make a call

from one of your cell phone's call lists.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone > dial from call list

Phone dial from call list

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

Calling a contact

The dialogue below enables you to call the pre-

defined contacts in your cell phone. See the

phone's user's guide if necessary.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone > call contact

Phone call contact

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

When calling contacts, keep the following in

mind:

•If there are several contacts with similar

names, they will be presented in the dis-

05 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

240

play in numbered lines and the system will

prompt you to pick a line number

•If there are more lines in the list than can

be displayed at one time, saying "Down"

will enable you to scroll downward in the

list (and saying "up" will take you back up

through the list).

Dialing voicemail

The dialogue below enables you to call your

voicemail to check any messages that you may

have received. Your voicemail phone number

must be registered in the Bluetooth function,

see page 232.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone > dial voicemail

Phone dial voicemail

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

05 Infotainment

Infotainment system menus

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

Navigating in the menus

Infotainment settings are made via the sys-

tem's menus. Press one of the mode buttons

(RADIO, MEDIA, or TEL—see the illustration

on page 202) to select it and access its specific

menus. When a mode has been selected, press

OK/MENU to access its menus.

Menu selections can be made using the con-

trols in the center console and certain functions

can also be controlled from the steering wheel

keypad. Each mode is described in its respec-

tive section.

Controls in the center console

RADIO

MEDIA

TEL

TUNE

OK/MENU

Search paths

Throughout this manual, search paths to the

menu system functions are listed as shown in

the following example: FM1Autostore, if the

following steps have been taken first:

1. Press the desired mode button, (RADIO,

MEDIA, etc). Continue pressing the button

to navigate through the various selections

displayed (e.g., FM1). Release the button

and wait several seconds to automatically

accept the selection or turn TUNE and

press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE or use the thumb wheel on the

steering wheel keypad to scroll to the

desired menu selection, such as Audio

settings, and press OK/MENU to confirm

a selection.

3. Turn TUNE again to scroll to the desired

submenu (e.g., Equalizer) where applica-

ble and press OK/MENU.

RADIO menus

Main AM menu

AM menu

Show presets

Scan

Audio settings1

Sound stage

Equalizer

Volume compensation

Reset all audio settings

Main FM1/FM2 menu

FM menu

Show radio text

Show presets

Scan

Advanced settings

Reset all FM settings

Audio settings1

Main Sirius1*/Sirius2* menu

SIRIUS radio off.\nPress RADIO button to

activate SIRIUS.

1The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

05 Infotainment

Infotainment system menus

242

Song memory

Add song

Song seek

Delete song

View song memory

Channel list information

Station name

Artist

Title

Information

Show presets

Category list

Advanced SIRIUS settings

Skip options

Channel skip list

Lock options

Channel lock list

Unlock all channels

Temporarily unlock all chan-

nels

Change code

Audio settings1

MEDIA menus

Main CD Audio menu

Disc menu

Random

Scan

Audio settings1

Main CD/DVD Data menu

Disc menu

Play/pause

Stop

Random

Repeat folder

Change subtitles

Change tracks

Scan

Audio settings1

Main DVD Video menu

Disc menu

DVD disc menu

Play/Pause/Continue

Stop

Subtitles

Audio tracks

Advanced settings

Angle

DivX® VOD code

Audio settings1

Main iPod menu

iPod menu

Random

Scan

Audio settings1

Main USB menu

USB menu

Random

Play/pause

Stop

1The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

05 Infotainment

Infotainment system menus

243

Repeat folder

Select USB device

Change subtitles

Change track

Scan

Audio settings1

Main Bluetooth media menu

Bluetooth menu

Random

Change Bluetooth device

Remove Bluetooth device

Scan

Bluetooth software version in car

Audio settings1

Main AUX menu

AUX menu

AUX input volume

Audio settings1

TEL menus

Main Bluetooth



hands-free menu

Phone main menu

Call list

All calls

Missed calls

Answered calls

Dialed calls

Call duration

Phone book

New contact

Speed dials

Receive vCard

Memory status

Clear phone book

Change phone

Remove Bluetooth device

Phone settings

Discoverable

Sounds and volume

Download phone book

Bluetooth software version in

car

Call options

Auto answer

Voicemail number

Phone off

1The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

244

Driving recommendations..................................................................... 246

Refueling............................................................................................... 250

Loading................................................................................................. 255

Cargo area ........................................................................................... 259

Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 262

Emergency towing................................................................................ 265

DURING YOUR TRIP

06 During your trip

Driving recommendations

246

General information

Economical driving conserves natural

resources

Better driving economy may be obtained by

thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops

and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to

immediate traffic conditions.

Observe the following rules:

•Bring the engine to normal operating tem-

perature as soon as possible by driving

with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for

the first few minutes of operation. A cold

engine uses more fuel and is subject to

increased wear.

•Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle

for driving short distances. This does not

allow the engine to reach normal operating

temperature.

•Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration

and hard braking.

•Use the transmission's Drive (D) position

as often as possible and avoid using kick-

down.

•Using the transmission's Sport mode1 may

decrease fuel consumption somewhat.

Use the transmission's Drive (D) position

as often as possible. See page 113 for

additional information about Sport mode.

•Do not exceed posted speed limits.

•Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra

load) in the vehicle.

•Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire

pressure regularly (when tires are cold).

•Remove snow tires when threat of snow or

ice has ended.

•Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,

increase air resistance and also fuel con-

sumption.

•At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-

tion will be lower with the air conditioning

on and the windows closed than with the

air conditioning off and the windows open.

•Using the onboard trip computer's fuel

consumption modes can help you learn

how to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

•Dirty air cleaner

•Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

•Dragging brakes

•Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and others

are checked at the standard maintenance

intervals.

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with

the tailgate open could lead to poisonous

exhaust gases entering the passenger com-

partment. If the tailgate must be kept open

for any reason, proceed as follows:

•Close the windows

•Set the ventilation system control to air

flow to floor, windshield and side win-

dows and the blower control to its high-

est setting.

Weight distribution affects handling

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a

tendency to understeer, which means that the

steering wheel has to be turned more than

might seem appropriate for the curvature of a

bend. This ensures good stability and reduces

the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that

these properties can alter with the vehicle load.

The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less

the tendency to understeer.

Handling, roadholding

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure

all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check

that the tires are inflated to the recommended

pressure according to the vehicle load. See the

"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-

1Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

06 During your trip

Driving recommendations

247

tributed so that capacity weight or maximum

permissible axle loads are not exceeded.

Driving through water

•The vehicle can be driven through water up

to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm),

at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

•Take particular care when driving through

flowing water.

•Clean the electrical connections for trailer

wiring after driving in mud or water.

•When driving through water, maintain low

speed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

After driving through water, press lightly on

the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes

are functioning normally. Water or mud can

make the brake linings slippery, resulting in

delayed braking effect.

CAUTION

•Engine damage will occur if water is

drawn into the air cleaner.

•If the vehicle is driven through water

deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may

enter the differential and the transmis-

sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating

capacity and may shorten the service

life of these components.

•Do not allow the vehicle to stand in

water up to the door sills longer than

absolutely necessary. This could result

in electrical malfunctions.

•If the engine has been stopped while the

vehicle is in water, do not attempt to

restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of

the water.

Engine and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example when

driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with

heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and

cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol-

lows to avoid overheating the engine.

•Maintain a low speed when driving with a

trailer up long, steep hills.

•Do not turn the engine off immediately

when stopping after a hard drive.

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue to

operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine

has been switched off.

•Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of

the grille when driving in hot weather con-

ditions.

•Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm

if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil

temperature could become too high.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimize

battery drain:

•When the engine is not running, avoid

using ignition mode II. Many electrical sys-

tems (the audio system, the optional navi-

gation system, power windows, etc) will

function in ignition modes 0 and I. These

modes reduce drain on the battery.

•Please keep in mind that using systems,

accessories, etc., that consume a great

deal of current when the engine is not run-

ning could result in the battery being com-

pletely drained. Driving or having the

engine running for approximately

15 minutes will help keep the battery

charged.

•The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo

area provides electrical current even with

06 During your trip

Driving recommendations

248

the ignition switched off, which drains the

battery.

Before a long distance trip

It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle

checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician before driving long distances.

Your retailer will also be able to supply you with

bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for

your use in the event that problems occur.

As a minimum, the following items should be

checked before any long trip:

•Check that engine runs smoothly and that

fuel consumption is normal.

•Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

•Have the transmission oil level checked.

•Check condition of drive belts.

•Check state of the battery's charge.

•Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as

well), and replace those that are worn.

Check tire pressures.

•The brakes, front wheel alignment, and

steering gear should be checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian only.

•Check all lights, including high beams.

•Reflective warning triangles are legally

required in some states/provinces.

•Have a word with a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician if you intend to

drive in countries where it may be difficult

to obtain the correct fuel.

•Consider your destination. If you will be

driving through an area where snow or ice

are likely to occur, consider snow tires.

Cold weather precautions

If you wish to check your vehicle before the

approach of cold weather, the following advice

is worth noting:

•Make sure that the engine coolant contains

50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture

will reduce freeze protection. This gives

protection against freezing down to

–31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" anti-

freeze is not approved by Volvo. Different

types of antifreeze must not be mixed.

•Volvo recommends using only genuine

Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

•Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this

helps prevent the formation of condensa-

tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely

cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to

add fuel line de-icer before refueling.

•The viscosity of the engine oil is important.

Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves

cold-weather starting as well as decreas-

ing fuel consumption while the engine is

warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par-

ticularly the synthetic type, is recom-

mended. Be sure to use good quality oil but

do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving

or in warm weather, see page 342 for more

information on engine oil.

NOTE

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is

changed at the normal maintenance inter-

vals except at owner request and at addi-

tional charge.

•The load placed on the battery is greater

during the winter since the windshield wip-

ers, lighting, etc. are used more often.

Moreover, the capacity of the battery

decreases as the temperature drops. In

very cold weather, a poorly charged bat-

tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-

fore advisable to check the state of charge

more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil

on the battery posts.

•Volvo recommends the use of snow tires

on all four wheels for winter driving, see

page 283.

•To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from

freezing, add washer solvents containing

antifreeze. This is important since dirt is

often splashed on the windshield during

winter driving, requiring the frequent use of

the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer

Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down

to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and

06 During your trip

Driving recommendations

249

4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part

washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to

0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and

2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C):

1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.

•Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

•Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can

cause damage to the locks.

06 During your trip

Refueling

250

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-

oline to control engine deposits. Detergent

gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and

intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit

control gasolines will help ensure good driva-

bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure

whether the gasoline contains deposit control

additives, check with the service station oper-

ator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-

nal fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter

and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and

Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv-

ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA-

DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which

fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis-

pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled

"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline

damages the three-way catalytic converter and

the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated

use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

ness of the emission control system and could

result in loss of emission warranty coverage.

State and local vehicle inspection programs

will make detection of misfueling easier, pos-

sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-

fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain

an octane enhancing additive called methyl-

cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission

Control System performance may be affec-

ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc-

tion indicator light) located on your instru-

ment panel may light. If this occurs, please

return your vehicle to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or

ethers. In some areas, state or local laws

require that the service pump be marked indi-

cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,

there are areas in which the pumps are

unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is

alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check

with the service station operator. To meet sea-

sonal air quality standards, some areas require

the use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-

ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed

on page 251 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume

may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to

as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to

15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice

can result in vehicle performance deterioration

and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-

tem. Such damage may not be covered under

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

06 During your trip

Refueling

251

Octane rating

Minimum octane

G028920

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per-

formance, but using 87 octane1 or above will

not affect engine reliability.

Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated

horsepower, torque, and fuel economy per-

formance using premium 91 octane fuel.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as oper-

ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,

or driving for extended periods at higher alti-

tudes than normal, it may be advisable to

switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to

change gasoline brands to fully utilize your

engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos-

sible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel or

changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-

sary to fill the tank more than once before a

difference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a

knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.

Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-

trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been

strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.

Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to

certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area

where you must fill your own gas tank, take

precautions. These may include:

•standing upwind away from the filler nozzle

while refueling

•refueling only at gas stations with vapor

recovery systems that fully seal the mouth

of the filler neck during refueling

•wearing neoprene gloves while handling a

fuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze during

winter months, do not add solvents, thicken-

ers, or other store-bought additives to your

vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.

Overuse may damage your engine, and some

of these additives contain organically volatile

chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself

to these chemicals.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched

on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone

rings, this may cause a spark that could

ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and

injury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,

and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust

gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes

inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger

compartment is ventilated, and immediately

return the vehicle to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for correction.

1AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

06 During your trip

Refueling

252

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

The fuel filler door is located on the right rear

fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel

tank symbol on the information display )

With the ignition switched off, press and

release the button on the lighting panel to

unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the

fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the

vehicle begins to move forward. An audible

click will be heard when the fuel filler door

relocks.

•If you intend to leave your vehicle while it

is being refueled, this feature enables you

to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the

fuel filler door unlocked.

•You can also keep the vehicle locked if you

remain inside it during refueling. The cen-

tral locking button does not lock the fuel

filler door.

•Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed

and is completely closed after refueling.

•Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot

weather.

Close the fuel filler door by pressing it a click

indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION

•Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.

In addition to causing damage to the

environment, gasolines containing

alcohol can cause damage to painted

surfaces, which may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

Manually opening the fuel filler door

If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened

manually:

1. Open the side hatch in the cargo compart-

ment (on the same side as the fuel filler

door).

2. Grasp the green cord with a handle.

3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until

the fuel filler door clicks open.

06 During your trip

Refueling

253

Opening/closing the fuel cap

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the

filler cap slowly.

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn-

ing it clockwise until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

•Do not refuel with the engine running2.

Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the

ignition is on, an incorrect reading could

occur in the fuel gauge.

•Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not

press the handle on the filler nozzle

more than one extra time. Too much fuel

in the tank in hot weather conditions can

cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling

could also cause damage to the emis-

sion control systems.

Emission controls

Three-way catalytic converter

•Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain

engine malfunctions, particularly involving

the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition

systems, may cause unusually high three-

way catalytic converter temperatures. Do

not continue to operate your vehicle if you

detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of

power or other unusual operating condi-

tions, such as engine overheating or back-

firing. A properly tuned engine will help

avoid malfunctions that could damage the

three-way catalytic converter.

•Do not park your vehicle over combustible

materials, such as grass or leaves, which

can come into contact with the hot exhaust

system and cause such materials to ignite

under certain wind and weather condi-

tions.

•Excessive starter cranking (in excess of

one minute), or an intermittently firing or

flooded engine can cause three-way cata-

lytic converter or exhaust system over-

heating.

•Remember that tampering or unauthorized

modifications to the engine, the Engine

Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille-

gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-

verter or exhaust system overheating. This

includes: altering fuel injection settings or

components, altering emission system

components or location or removing com-

ponents, and/or repeated use of leaded

fuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with

three-way catalytic converters.

2If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's

performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

06 During your trip

Refueling

254

Heated oxygen sensors

The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-

gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings

are fed into a control module that continuously

monitors engine functions and controls fuel

injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine

is continuously adjusted for efficient combus-

tion to help reduce harmful emissions.

06 During your trip

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

Introduction

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is

determined by factors such as the number of

passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight

of any accessories that may be installed, etc.

To increase loading space, the rear seat back-

rests can be folded down, see page 85.

When loading the cargo area, keep the follow-

ing in mind:

•Load objects in the cargo area against the

backrest whenever possible.

•Unstable loads can be secured to the load

anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash-

ings to help keep them from shifting.

•Stop the engine and apply the parking

brake when loading or unloading long

objects. The gear selector can be knocked

out of position by long loads, which could

set the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

•Stop the engine, put the gear selector in

P, and apply the parking brake when

loading or unloading long objects.

•The vehicle's driving characteristics

may change depending on the weight

and distribution of the load.

•A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a

force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a

head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

•The cargo area and rear seat should not

be loaded to a level higher than 2 in.

(5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear

side windows. Objects placed higher

than this level could impede the func-

tion of the Inflatable Curtain.

Power tailgate*

G031965

Power tailgate closing button

Automatic opening

The power tailgate can be opened automati-

cally in the three ways:

•By pressing and holding the but-

ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate

begins to open.

•By pressing and holding the button

on the remote key until the tailgate begins

to open.

•By pressing the rubber-covered button

under the outer handle on the tailgate.

The taillights illuminate automatically when the

automatic open function is used.

06 During your trip

256

CAUTION

Be sure that there is adequate space above

and behind the vehicle before opening the

tailgate automatically.

The vehicle should not be driven or moved

with the tailgate in the open position. How-

ever, if the vehicle is moved with the tailgate

in the open position, the automatic closing

function will be inoperative until one of the

following occurs:

•The tailgate is closed manually

•The ignition is switched off and the key

is removed for approximately 10

minutes (the tailgate will function again

after restart).

NOTE

If the tailgate has been opened and closed

continuously for more than 60 seconds, the

automatic function will be deactivated to

avoid overloading the electrical system. The

automatic function can be used again after

approximately 10 minutes.

If the vehicle's battery has been discharged

or disconnected, the tailgate must be

opened and closed once manually to reset

the system.

Automatic closing

The power tailgate can be closed by pressing

the button on the tailgate (see the illus-

tration) or by pressing it down.

NOTE

If the tailgate is pressed down e.g., by the

weight of snow or strong wind, it will close

automatically.

WARNING

Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when

it is opened or closed automatically. The

tailgate should never be obstructed in any

way when it is operated.

Interrupting automatic opening/closing

Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can

be interrupted in four ways:

•By pressing the button on the

lighting panel.

•By pressing the button on the

remote key.

•By pressing the button on the lower edge

of the tailgate.

•By pressing the rubber-covered button

under the outer handle on the tailgate.

If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate will

stop and reopen.

Pinch protection

If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being

operated, the pinch protection function is acti-

vated.

•If the tailgate is being opened, the electri-

cal function will be switched off and the

tailgate will be released from the electrical

system.

•If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop

and reopen.

Operating the tailgate manually

The power tailgate can be disconnected from

the vehicle’s electrical system by quickly pull-

ing the outer handle twice. The tailgate can

then be opened/closed manually.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The rear seat backrests can be folded down for

additional loading space. See page 86 for infor-

mation.

06 During your trip

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257

Load anchoring eyelets

The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the

vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help

anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

•Cover sharp edges on long loads to help

prevent injury to occupants. Secure the

load to help prevent shifting during sud-

den stops.

•Always secure large and heavy objects

with a seat belt or cargo retaining

straps.

•Always secure the load to help prevent

it from moving in the event of sudden

stops.

•Switch off the engine, apply the parking

brake and put the gear selector in P

when loading and unloading the vehicle.

Grocery bag holder*

G017745

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo

area

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags

in place.

1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo

area.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

06 During your trip

258

Roof loads

Using load carriers

Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso-

ries. Observe the following points when in use:

•To avoid damaging your vehicle and to

achieve maximum safety when driving, we

recommend using the load carriers that

Volvo has developed especially for your

vehicle.

•Volvo-approved removable roof racks are

designed to carry the maximum allowable

roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).

For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-

ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

•Never exceed the rack manufacturer's

weigh limits and never exceed the maxi-

mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

•Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads

evenly.

•Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the

load.

•Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-

ate tie-down equipment.

•Check periodically that the load carriers

and load are properly secured.

•Remember that the vehicle's center of

gravity and handling change when you

carry a load on the roof.

•The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con-

sumption will increase with the size of the

load.

•Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast

cornering and hard braking.

06 During your trip

Cargo area

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

Steel cargo grid*

G031978

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid

that helps prevent objects in the cargo area

from moving forward into the passenger com-

partment.

Folding the grid up/down

Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it

rearward/upward, or push it downward/for-

ward.

NOTE

If the steel grid is to be used with the

optional cargo area cover, the grid must be

folded down before the cargo area cover is

put in place.

Installing the steel cargo grid

For information about the necessary tools and

procedures for installing/removing the steel

cargo grid, please refer to the assembly

instructions1 that were included when the grid

was purchased.

Cargo area cover*

G031977

Use

•Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it

into the holes in the rear cargo area pillars.

•To retract (roll up) the cover, release it from

the holes and guide it toward the rear seat

backrest.

Installing the cover

1. Press the end piece on one side of the

cargo area cover into the retaining bracket

in the side panel of the cargo area .

2. Do the same on the opposite side .

3. Press both sides of the cover until they

click into place . The red mark will no

longer be visible.

4. Check that both ends of the cover are

securely locked in place.

Removing the cover

1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover

inward.

2. Pull the cover carefully upward and out-

ward. The other end will release automati-

cally from its retaining bracket.

Folding down the cargo area cover's rear

flap

The cargo area cover's rear flap points hori-

zontally when the cover is retracted (rolled up).

To fold it down:

Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup-

ports and fold it down.

1Assembly instruction no. 30715972.

06 During your trip

Cargo area

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

On models equipped with this cover, it

should be removed before a child seat is

attached to the child restraint anchors.

Cargo net*

G034213

Cargo net mounted in rear position

Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo net

made of strong nylon fabric that helps prevent

objects in the cargo area from moving forward

into the passenger compartment.

The net can be attached in two different places:

•Rear position: behind the rear seat back-

rest

•Front position: behind the front seat back-

rests

WARNING

•Be sure that the cargo net's upper

attachment hooks are properly inserted

in the brackets and that the lower straps

are correctly attached and pulled taut.

•A damaged cargo net should never be

used.

•Objects in the cargo area should be

securely anchored, even if the cargo net

is correctly installed and in use.

Mounting the cargo net

The cargo net is easiest to put in place through

one of the rear doors.

1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure that the

upper hinged rod is straight and locked in

position.

2. Insert one end of the rod into the front or

rear bracket (near the ceiling). Be sure that

the lock on the lower strap is facing toward

you.

3. Insert the other end of the rod in the oppo-

site bracket.

– Be sure to press the end hooks on the rod

as far forward as possible in the brackets.

Cargo net in rear position

4. Mounting in the rear position: With the net's

rod attached to the rear upper brackets,

hook the lower straps in the floor eyelets in

the cargo area. Pull the net strap taut.

06 During your trip

Cargo area

261

Cargo net in front position

Mounting in the front position: With the

net's rod attached to the front upper brack-

ets, hook the lower straps in the eyelets in

the front seat rails. Attaching the net is eas-

ier if the front seat backrests are upright

and the seats are moved slightly forward.

If the front seats are moved rearward, they

should not press hard against the net.

CAUTION

Pressure from the front seats against the

cargo net could damage the net and/or its

brackets.

5. Pull the net strap taut.

Removing and storing the cargo net

Press the release buttons on the locks on

the straps and pull out a small section of

the strap.

Press in the catches on the straps' hooks

and remove the hooks from the eyelet.

Fold up the net's rod at the center and roll

up the net.

When not in use, the cargo net can be stored

under floor of the cargo area.

06 During your trip

Towing a trailer

262

Introduction

Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer

hitches that are specially designed for the vehi-

cle.

NOTE

See page 339 for the maximum trailer and

tongue weights recommended by Volvo.

•Observe the legal requirements of the

state/province in which the vehicles are

•All Volvo models are equipped with

energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-

ers. Trailer hitch installation should not

interfere with the proper operation of this

bumper system.

Trailer towing does not normally present any

particular problems, but take into considera-

tion:

•Increase tire pressure to recommended full

pressure. See the tire inflation tables

beginning on page 275.

•When your vehicle is new, avoid towing

heavy trailers during the first 620 miles

(1,000 km).

•Maximum speed when towing a trailer:

50 mph (80 km/h).

•Engine and transmission are subject to

increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant

temperature should be closely watched

when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.

Use a lower gear and turn off the air con-

ditioner if the temperature gauge needle

enters the red range.

•If the automatic transmission begins to

overheat, a message will be displayed in

the text window.

•Avoid overload and other abusive opera-

tion.

•Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-

ity, and economy.

•It is necessary to balance trailer brakes

with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a

safe stop (check and observe state/local

regulations).

•Do not connect the trailer's brake system

directly to the vehicle's brake system.

•More frequent vehicle maintenance is

required.

•Remove the ball and drawbar assembly

when the hitch is not being used.

•Volvo recommends the use of synthetic

engine oil when towing a trailer over long

distances or in mountainous areas.

WARNING

•Bumper-attached trailer hitches must

not be used on Volvos, nor should

safety chains be attached to the

bumper.

•Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle

rear axle must not be used.

•Never connect a trailer's hydraulic

brake system directly to the vehicle

brake system, nor a trailer's lighting

system directly to the vehicle lighting

system. Consult your nearest author-

ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-

tion.

•When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety

wire must be correctly fastened to the

hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch

on the vehicle. The safety wire should

never be fastened to or wound around

the drawbar ball.

06 During your trip

Towing a trailer

263

NOTE

•When parking the vehicle with a trailer

on a hill, apply the parking brake before

putting the gear selector in P. Always

follow the trailer manufacturer's recom-

mendations for wheel chocking.

•When starting on a hill, put the gear

selector in D before releasing the park-

ing brake. See also page 119 for more

detailed information about starting off

on a hill while towing a trailer.

•If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift

positions while towing a trailer, make

sure the gear you select does not put

too much strain on the engine (using too

high a gear).

•The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may

be rated for trailers heavier than the

vehicle is designed to tow. Please

adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer

weights.

•Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of

more than 15 %.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer

hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has

7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by

Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on

the ground.

Detachable trailer hitch (accessory)

G010496

Ball holder

Locking bolt

Cotter pin

Hitch assembly

Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from

the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt

out of the hitch assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-

bly.

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one

in the hitch assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch

assembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end

of the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt

and slide the locking bolt out of the ball

holder/hitch assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem-

bly.

NOTE

A cover for the hitch assembly is also

included in the kit.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)

Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to

help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer

when the vehicle and trailer have begun to

sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and

Traction Control system (DSTC). See page

144 for information on DSTC.

Function

A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for

various reasons. Normally this only occurs at

high speeds but, for example, if the trailer is

overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed

in the trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds

06 During your trip

Towing a trailer

264

between approximately 45-55 mph (70-90 km/

h).

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

•The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,

strong crosswind

•The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an

uneven road surface or drive over a bump

•Sudden movements of the steering wheel

Facts about TSA

•TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi-

mately 40 mph (60 km/h)

•The DSTC symbol ( ) in the instru-

ment panel will flash when TSA is working

•If the driver switches off the DSTC sys-

tem's Spin Control function, TSA will also

be switched off (but will be on again the

next time the engine is started)

•TSA may not intervene when the vehicle

and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries

to compensate for the swaying motion by

moving the steering wheel rapidly

How TSA works

Once swaying has begun, it can be very diffi-

cult to stop, which makes it difficult to control

the vehicle and trailer.

The TSA system continuously monitors the

vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

movement. If the system detects a tendency to

sway, the brakes are applied individually on the

front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on

the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to

enable the driver to regain control of the vehi-

cle.

If this is not adequate to stop the swaying

motion, the brakes are applied to all of the

wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is

equipped with brakes, and engine power is

temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion

begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have

once again become stable, TSA will no stop

regulating the brakes/engine power and the

driver regains control of the vehicle.

06 During your trip

Emergency towing

265

Towing eyelet

Location of the towing eyelet

Attaching the towing eyelet

The towing eyelet is located under the floor

of the cargo area, with the spare tire and

may be partially concealed. This eyelet

must be screwed into the positions provi-

ded on the right sides of either the front or

rear bumper (see illustration).

There are two different types of covers over

the openings for the towing eyelet and they

have to be opened differently.

•If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,

etc., into the notch and pry open the

edge of the cover. Open the cover com-

pletely and remove it.

•If the cover has a mark along one edge

or in a corner, press the mark while pry-

ing out the opposite side/corner using a

coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it.

Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand

and then using the tire iron until it is securely in

place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet

should be removed and returned to its storage

location.

Press the cover for the attachment point back

into position.

NOTE

On certain models equipped with a trailer

hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed

into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing

rope should be attached to the trailer hitch

instead. For this reason, the detachable

section of the trailer hitch should be safely

stowed in the vehicle at all times.

CAUTION

If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed

truck, the towing eyelets must not be used

to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed.

WARNING

•Remember that the power brakes and

power steering will not function when

engine is not running. The braking and

steering systems will function but con-

siderably higher pressure will be

required on the brake pedal and greater

steering effort must be exerted.

•The towing eyelets must not be used for

pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for

any similar purpose involving severe

strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to

pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow

truck.

06 During your trip

Emergency towing

266

Precautions when the vehicle is in tow

•Attach jumper cables (see page 110) to

provide current for releasing the optional

electric parking brake and to move the gear

selector from the P position.

•The gear selector must be in position N.

•Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not

exceed the maximum allowable towing

speed.

•Maximum distance with front wheels on

ground: 50 miles (80 km).

•While the vehicle is being towed, try to

keep the tow rope taut at all times.

•The vehicle should only be towed in the

forward direction.

NOTE

During towing, ignition mode II should be

used so that the lighting can be switched on.

CAUTION

Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with the

front wheels off the ground should not be

towed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) or

for distances longer than 30 miles (50 km).

CAUTION

•Please check with state and local

authorities before attempting this type

of towing, as vehicles being towed are

subject to regulations regarding maxi-

mum towing speed, length and type of

towing device, lighting, etc.

•If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not

attempt to start the vehicle by pushing

or pulling it as this will damage the

three-way catalytic converter(s). The

engine must be jump started using an

auxiliary battery (see page 110).

•If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed

truck, the towing eyelets must not be

used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat

bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat

bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/

All Wheel Drive

Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip-

ment.

•If wheel lift equipment must be used,

please use extreme caution to help avoid

damage to the vehicle. In this case, the

vehicle should be towed with the rear

wheels on the ground if at all possible.

•If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehi-

cle with the front wheels on the ground,

please refer to the towing information on

page 265.

CAUTION

•Sling-type equipment applied at the

front will damage radiator and air con-

ditioning lines.

•It is equally important not to use sling-

type equipment at the rear or apply lift-

ing equipment inside the rear wheels;

serious damage to the rear axle may

result.

•If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed

truck, the towing eyelets must not be

used to secure the vehicle on the flat

bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

06 During your trip

267

268

General information .............................................................................. 270

Tire inflation........................................................................................... 273

Inflation pressure—U.S. models .......................................................... 275

Inflation pressure—Canadian models................................................... 276

Tire designations .................................................................................. 277

Glossary of tire terminology ................................................................. 279

Vehicle loading ..................................................................................... 280

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................................................... 282

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ............................................... 283

Temporary Spare ................................................................................. 284

Tire Sealing System.............................................................................. 285

Changing a wheel ................................................................................ 291

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 294

WHEELS AND TIRES

07 Wheels and tires

General information

270

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with tires according

to the vehicle's tire information placard on the

B-pillar (the structural member at the side of

the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door

opening).

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with an

Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com-

bination designed to provide maximum dry

pavement performance with consideration

for hydroplaning resistance. They may be

more susceptible to road hazard damage

and, depending on driving conditions, may

achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles

(30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped

with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC sys-

tem, these tires are not designed for winter

driving, and should be replaced with winter

tires when weather conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-

tics and offer good handling on dry and wet

surfaces. It should be noted however that the

tires have been developed to give these fea-

tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season"

tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree

of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires

without the "all-season" rating. However, for

optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered

roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on

all four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires

are the same size designation, type (radial) and

preferably from the same manufacturer, on all

four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering

the car's roadholding and handling characte-

ristics.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. As

of 2000, the manufacturing week and year

(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)

will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means

that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur-

ing week 15 of 2010).

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are

not being used. It is recommended that tires

generally be replaced after 6 years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent

high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.)

exposure can accelerate the aging process.

The temporary spare1 should also be replaced

at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been

used.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOT

stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration

should be replaced immediately.

Improving tire economy

•Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire

inflation tables beginning on page 275.

•Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard

braking and tire screeching.

•Tire wear increases with speed.

•Correct front wheel alignment is very

important.

•Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy

and driving comfort.

•Tires must maintain the same direction of

rotation throughout their lifetime.

1Option or accessory on some models

07 Wheels and tires

General information

271

•When replacing tires, the tires with the

most tread should be mounted on the rear

wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer

during hard braking.

•Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the

tires and/or wheels permanently.

Summer and winter tires

G021778

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the

tire

•When switching between summer and

winter tires, mark the tires to indicate

where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,

LF = left front, RR = right rear

•Tires with tread designed to roll in only one

direction are marked with an arrow on the

sidewall.

•Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's

braking properties and ability to force

aside rain, snow and slush.

•The tires with the most tread should always

be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-

ding).

•Contact a Volvo workshop if you are

unsure about the tread depth.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mounted

on rims), they should be suspended off the

floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on

their sides or standing upright, but should not

be suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,

dry, dark place, and should never be stored

in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,

etc.

WARNING

•The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo

are specified to meet stringent stability

and handling requirements. Unap-

proved wheel/tire size combinations

can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-

bility and handling.

•Any damage caused by installation of

unapproved wheel/tire size combina-

tions will not be covered by your new

vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no

responsibility for death, injury, or

expenses that may result from such

installations.

Tire wear

Tire rotation

Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire

wear is affected by a number of factors such

as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving

style, etc.

07 Wheels and tires

General information

272

NOTE

•If the tires are rotated, they should only

be moved from front to rear or vice

versa. They should never be rotated left

to right/right to left.

•Ideally, tire rotation should be done the

first time after approximately 3,000

miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at

6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some

customers find that tire rotation may

help to get extra mileage from tire life.

•Tire rotation should only be performed

if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and

tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Tread wear indicator

G021829

The tires have wear indicator strips running

across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

are printed on the side of the tire. When

approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the

tread, these strips become visible and indicate

that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less

than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-

tion.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommended

that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size

as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the

same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-

tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

273

Inflation placard

G032521

Tire inflation placard

Tire inflation

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

See the tire inflation tables beginning on page

275. A tire inflation pressure placard is also

located on the driver's side B-pillar (the struc-

tural member at the side of the vehicle, at the

rear of the driver's door opening). This placard

indicates the designation of the factory-moun-

ted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits

and inflation pressure.

NOTE

•The placards shown indicate inflation

pressure for the tires installed on the

vehicle at the factory only.

•A certain amount of air seepage from

the tires occurs naturally and tire pres-

sure fluctuates with seasonal changes

in temperature. Always check tire pres-

sure regularly.

•Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation

pressure, including the spare, at least once

a month and before long trips. You are

strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres-

sure gauge, as automatic service station

gauges may be inaccurate.

•Use the recommended cold inflation pres-

sure for optimum tire performance and

wear.

•Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause

uneven treadwear patterns.

NOTE

A certain amount of air seepage from the

tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluc-

tuates with seasonal changes in tempera-

ture. Always check tire pressure regularly.

WARNING

•Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failure and may result in

severe tire cracking, tread separation,

or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of

vehicle control and increased risk of

injury.

•Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-

rying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur, tire

inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree

temperature drop causes a corresponding

drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check

your tire pressures frequently and adjust them

to the proper pressure, which can be found on

the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-

cation label.

Checking tire pressure

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when the

tires are cold.

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

274

After driving a distance of approximately

1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be

hot. If you have to drive farther than this dis-

tance to pump your tire(s), check and record

the tire pressure first and add the appropriate

air pressure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,

never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires

are hot from driving and it is normal for pres-

sures to increase above recommended cold

pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended

cold inflation pressure could be significantly

under-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,

then firmly press the tire gauge onto the

valve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended air

pressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there

are no nails or other objects embedded

that could puncture the tire and cause an

air leak.

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are

no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-

ities.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-

ing the spare.

NOTE

•If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the center

of the valve. Then recheck the pressure

with your tire gauge.

•Some spare tires require higher inflation

pressure than the other tires. Consult

the tire inflation tables or see the infla-

tion pressure placard.

Tire ratings

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-

low:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Speed ratings

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Load ratings

See page 277 for an explanation of the load

rating on the sidewall of the tire.

07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure—U.S. models

275

Tire inflation pressure table

The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 273 for its location) for information

specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons

Front

psi/kPa

Rear

psi/kPa

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

235/55 R19

255/45 R20

35/240 35/240

Temporary spare tire 61/420 61/420

07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure—Canadian models

276

Tire inflation pressure table

The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 273 for its location) for information

specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons Optional tire pressure for up to 3 persons

Front

psi/kPa

Rear

psi/kPa

Front

psi/kPa

Rear

psi/kPa

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

235/55 R19

255/45 R20

39/270 39/270 35/240 35/240

Temporary spare tire 61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

277

Information on the sidewall

5 6 7 89

G010753

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers

place standardized information on the sidewall

of all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tire

sidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire des-

ignation is an example only and that this

particular tire may not be available on your

vehicle.

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The

larger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width

in percent.

3. R: Radial tire.

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in

inches).

5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a

load index of 95 equals a maximum load of

1521 lbs (690 kg).

6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum

speed at which the tire is designed to be

driven for extended periods of time, carry-

ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and

with correct inflation pressure. For exam-

ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph

(210 km/h).

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating may

not appear on the sidewall because they are

not required by law.

7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All

Terrain, AS = All Season

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"

and indicates that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers or letters

are the plant code where it was manufac-

tured, the next two are the tire size code

and the last four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built. For exam-

ple, 1510 means that the tire was manu-

factured during week 15 of 2010. The num-

bers in between are marketing codes used

at the manufacturer's discretion. This infor-

mation helps a tire manufacturer identify a

tire for safety recall purposes.

9. Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-

cates or the number of layers of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate the

ply materials in the tire and the sidewall,

which include steel, nylon, polyester, and

others.

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum

load in pounds and kilograms that can be

carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire

information placard located on the B-Pillar

for the correct tire pressure for your vehi-

cle.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

278

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: see page 282 for more informa-

tion.

12. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should ever be put in the tire. This

limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

279

Terms

The tire suppliers may have additional mark-

ings, notes or warnings such as standard load,

radial tubeless, etc.

•Tire information placard: A placard

showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire

sizes, recommended inflation pressure,

and the maximum weight the vehicle can

carry.

•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-

ber on the sidewall of each tire providing

information about the tire brand and man-

ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-

ufacturer.

•Inflation pressure: A measure of the

amount of air in a tire.

•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-

ric tires designed to carry a maximum load

at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond

this pressure will not increase the tires load

carrying capability.

•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric

tires designed to carry a heavier maximum

load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric

tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not increase the

tire's load carrying capability.

•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-

sure.

•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard

unit of air pressure.

•B-pillar: The structural member at the side

of the vehicle behind the front door.

•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next

to the rim.

•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the

bead area and the tread.

•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-

eter of the tire that contacts the road when

mounted on the vehicle.

•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or

a tire and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

•Maximum load rating: a figure indicating

the maximum load in pounds and kilo-

grams that can be carried by the tire. This

rating is established by the tire manufac-

turer.

•Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should ever be put in the tire. This

limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

•Recommended tire inflation pressure:

inflation pressure, established by Volvo,

which is based on the type of tires that are

mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This

information can be found on the tire infla-

tion placard(s) located on the driver's side

B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this

chapter.

•Cold tires: The tires are considered to be

cold when they have the same temperature

as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-

perature is normally reached after the vehi-

cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

280

Loads

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-

mum return of vehicle design performance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself

with the following terms for determining your

vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a

trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-

tion placard:

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tank

of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or optional equip-

ment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, including

cargo and optional equipment. When towing,

trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo

weight.

NOTE

For trailer towing information, please refer to

the section "Towing a trailer" on page 262.

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can be

carried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must

never exceed its maximum permissible weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-

gers.

NOTE

•The location of the various labels in your

vehicle can be found on page 336.

•A table listing important weight limits for

your vehicle can be found on page

339.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement "the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-

cle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX kilograms or

XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount

equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750

(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine

how this reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

1See page 262.

07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

281

WARNING

•Exceeding the permissible axle weight,

gross vehicle weight, or any other

weight rating limits can cause tire over-

heating resulting in permanent defor-

mation or catastrophic failure.

•Do not use replacement tires with lower

load carrying capacities than the tires

that were original equipment on the

vehicle because this will lower the vehi-

cle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the

correct load carrying capacity. Consult

your Volvo retailer for information.

07 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

282

Quality grading information

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-

ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)

times as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and many depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variation in driving

habits, maintenance practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test sur-

faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance. The trac-

tion grade assigned to this tire is based on

braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is

not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering

(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds

to a minimum level of performance that all pas-

senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-

eral Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of performance

on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-

inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and tire failure.

07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

283

Winter driving conditions

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with

the following restrictions:

•Snow chains should be installed on front

wheels only. Use only Volvo approved

snow chains.

•If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires

and wheels are installed and are of a size

different than the original tires and wheels,

chains in some cases CANNOT be used.

Sufficient clearances between chains and

brakes, suspension and body components

must be maintained.

•Some strap-on type chains will interfere

with brake components and therefore

CANNOT be used.

•All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains

should only be installed on the front

wheels.

•Certain size tires may not allow the assem-

bly of snow chains/traction devices.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow

chain information.

CAUTION

•Check local regulations regarding the

use of snow chains before installing.

•Use single-sided snow chains only.

•Always follow the chain manufacturer's

installation instructions carefully. Install

chains as tightly as possible and

retighten periodically.

•Never exceed the chain manufacturer's

specified maximum speed limit. (Under

no circumstances should you exceed

31 mph (50 km/h).

•Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns

when driving with snow chains.

•The handling of the vehicle can be

adversely affected when driving with

chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well

as locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires

Tires for winter use:

•Owners who live in or regularly commute

through areas with sustained periods of

snow or icy driving conditions are strongly

advised to fit suitable winter tires to help

retain the highest degree of traction.

•It is important to install winter tires on all

four wheels to help retain traction during

cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

ure to do so could reduce traction to an

unsafe level or adversely affect handling.

•Do not mix tires of different design as this

could also negatively affect overall tire road

grip.

•Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads

in warm weather. They should be removed

when the winter driving season has ended.

•Studded tires should be run-in

300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during

which the vehicle should be driven as

smoothly as possible to give the studs the

opportunity to seat properly in the tires.

The tires should have the same rotational

direction throughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-

tions restricting the use of studded winter

tires before installing such tires.

1Where permitted

07 Wheels and tires

Temporary Spare

284

Spare tire

The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem-

porary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placard

on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should

be maintained irrespective of which position on

the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new one

can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-

porary replacement for a punctured tire. It

must be replaced as soon as possible by a

standard tire. Road holding and handling

may be affected with the "Temporary

Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph

(80 km/h).

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with wheels

of different dimensions or with a spare tire

other than the one that came with the vehi-

cle. The use of different size wheels can

seriously damage your car's transmission.

1Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285

Location

Introduction

Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing

system* that enables you to temporarily seal a

hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,

or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

The system consists of an air compressor, a

container for the sealing compound, wiring to

connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical

system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a

hose used to connect the system to the tire’s

inflation valve.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front

tunnel console, on the rear side of the center

console in the rear seat and in the cargo

area*, see page 195.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under the

floor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.

2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

•The tire sealing system is only intended

to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not

the sidewall.

•Tires with large holes or tears cannot be

repaired with the tire sealing system.

•After use, stow the tire sealing system

properly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

•After using the tire sealing system, the

vehicle should not be driven farther than

approximately 120 miles (200 km).

•Have the tire inspected by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician as

soon as possible to determine if it can

be permanently repaired or must be

replaced.

•The vehicle should not be driven faster

than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire

that has been temporarily repaired with

the tire sealing system.

•After using the tire sealing system, drive

carefully and avoid abrupt steering

maneuvers and sudden stops.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

286

Tire sealing system–overview

Speed limit sticker

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mind

when using the tire sealing system:

•The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in

the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol

and natural rubber-latex. These sub-

stances are harmful if swallowed.

•The contents of this bottle may cause

allergic skin reactions or otherwise be

potentially harmful to the skin, the cen-

tral nervous system, and the eyes.

Precautions:

•Keep out of reach of children.

•Do not ingest the contents.

•Avoid prolonged or repeated contact

with the skin.

•Hands should be washed thoroughly

after handling.

First aid:

•Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with

soap and water. Get medical attention

if symptoms occur.

•Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least

15 minutes, occasionally lifting the

upper and lower eyelids. Get medical

attention if symptoms occur.

•Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.

If irritation persists, get medical atten-

tion.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

287

Tire sealing system–temporarily

repairing a flat tire

G014338

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two

stages:

•Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping

sealing compound into the tire. The car is

then driven a short distance to distribute

the sealing compound in the tire.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,

etc.) from the tire before using the sealing

system.

•Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is

checked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

•Never leave the tire sealing system

unattended when it is operating.

•Keep the tire sealing system away from

children.

•Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off

the road and away from moving traffic.

•Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it

to the steering wheel hub where it will be

clearly visible to the driver.

3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-

tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound may

cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash

the affected area immediately with soap and

water.

4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle

holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle

of sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep

it securely in place and help prevent sealing

compound leakage. Once in place, the bot-

tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done

by a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-

tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-

tem’s hose connector onto the valve as

tightly as possible by hand.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

288

7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

8. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

The vehicle´s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to avoid

battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle

is parked in a well ventilated place, or out-

doors, before using the system.

9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor

by pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WARNING

•Never stand next to the tire being inflated

when the compressor is in operation.

•If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,

switch off the compressor immediately.

•If there is visible damage to the sidewall

or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.

The vehicle should not be driven if this

occurs. Contact a towing service or

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if

applicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarily

show an increase in pressure to approxi-

mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-

pound is being pumped into the tire. The

pressure should return to a normal level

after approximately 30 seconds.

10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to

between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch

off the compressor briefly to get a clear

reading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi

(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,

turn off the compressor. In this case, the

hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle

should not be driven.

11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect

the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-

mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed

of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-

ing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the

use of the sealing compound may lead to

incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare

cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.

Use the tire sealing system to check and

adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

•Safely stow the tire sealing system in a

convenient place as it will soon be used

again to check the tire’s inflation pres-

sure.

•The empty bottle of sealing compound

cannot be removed from the bottle

holder. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician to have the

bottle removed and properly disposed

of.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

289

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering

behavior, or noises should occur while driv-

ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a

safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,

cracks, or other visible damage, and

recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure

is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue

driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-

bed in stage 1.

2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for the

correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs

to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s

compressor. If necessary, release air from

the tire by turning the air release knob

counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1

hour, check the inflation pressure in the

damaged tire again before continuing.

Replacing the sealing compound

container

The sealing compound container must be

replaced if:

•the tire sealing system has been used to

repair a tire

•the container’s expiration date has passed

(see the date on decal).

NOTE

•After use, the sealing compound bottle,

the hose, and certain other system

components must be replaced. Please

consult your Volvo retailer for replace-

ment parts.

•If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-

ration date has passed, please take it to

a Volvo retailer or a recycling station

that can properly dispose of harmful

substances.

Inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflate

the tires. To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.

Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-

tion valve and screw the hose connector

onto the valve as tightly as possible by

hand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

•The vehicle’s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to

avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure

the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated

place, or outdoors, before using the sys-

tem.

•Children should never be left unattended

in the vehicle when the engine is running.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

290

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the

gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to

get a clear reading from the pressure

gauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor-

rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs to

be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s

compressor (press the on/off switch to

position I). If necessary, release air from the

tire by turning the air release knob coun-

terclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off

switch to position 0) when the correct infla-

tion pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the

12-volt socket.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 291

Removing a wheel

Location of jack*, towing eyelet1 and tools*

Spare wheel

The spare wheel is only intended for temporary

use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as

possible. The car's handling may be altered by

the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire

pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tire

pressure tables beginning on page 275.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a tem-

porary replacement for a punctured tire. It

must be replaced as soon as possible by a

standard tire. Road holding and handling

may be affected with the “Temporary

Spare” in use.

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven with more

than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel

well with the rim side down. There are two foam

blocks, one under the spare wheel and one

over/inside. The upper one contains all tools.

The same bolt runs through to secure the spare

wheel and the foam blocks.

Taking out the spare wheel

1. Open the floor hatch.

2. Undo the retaining bolt.

3. Lift out the foam block with tools.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

The other two blocks can remain in the spare

wheel well.

After use

The foam block and spare wheel must be

replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow

on the upper foam block. It should point for-

ward.

Changing a wheel

1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in P.

2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing

eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool*

stowed under the floor of the trunk.

3. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-

ble) using the removal tool or remove the

wheel cover by hand.

4. Block the wheels that are on the ground

with wooden blocks or large stones.

1The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area. See the illustration on page 265 for its location.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

292

Lug wrench and towing eyelet

5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug

wrench as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

The towing eyelet must be screwed into the

lug wrench as far as possible.

6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the

lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the

wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting down-

ward (counterclockwise) pressure.

Jack attachment points

7. There are two jack attachment points on

each side of the vehicle. Position the jack

correctly in the attachment (see the illus-

tration) and crank while simultaneously

guiding the base of the jack to the ground.

The base of the jack must be flat on a level,

firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising

the vehicle, check that the jack is still cor-

rectly positioned in the attachment.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

293

WARNING

There are two attachment points near the

rear of the vehicle. Only the rear-most

attachment point is intended for the jack

(see the illustration).

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be

changed is lifted off the ground.

9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and

remove the wheel.

WARNING

•The jack must correctly engage the jack

attachment.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-

slippery surface.

•Never allow any part of your body to be

extended under a vehicle supported by

a jack.

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other job,

use stands to support the vehicle.

•Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

•The jack should be kept well-greased

and clean, and should not be damaged.

•No objects should be placed between

the base of jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

Re-installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

Tighten the lug nuts

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-

tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-

wise until all nuts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-

nately tighten the bolts crosswise to

103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).

The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's

inflation valve must be positioned over the

valve.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

294

Introduction

NOTE

USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sen-

sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-

tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov-

ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit

inflation pressure data to a receiver located in

the vehicle.

When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS

will light up the tire pressure warning light

() (also referred to as a telltale) in the

instrument panel and will display one of the

following messages in the text window: Tire

pressure low or Tire needs air now.

NOTE

If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure

warning light will flash for approximately

1 minute and Tire press. syst Service

required will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not reached

the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low

tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as

long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may

occur for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

1This system is standard on U.S. models and optional on Canadian models

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

295

NOTE

TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does

not replace normal tire maintenance. For

information on correct tire pressure, please

refer to the Tire inflation pressure tables or

consult your Volvo retailer.

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message has

been displayed, and the tire pressure warning

light has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

inflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure

(consult the tire pressure placard or the

inflation pressure tables beginning on page

275.

3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to

drive the vehicle for several minutes at a

speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This

will erase the warning text and the warning

light will go out.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire

failure, resulting in a loss of control of the

vehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS

Please note the following when changing or

replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/

tires on the vehicle:

•Only the factory-mounted wheels are

equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

•If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary

spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS

sensor.

•If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-

ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST

SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed

each time the vehicle is driven above

25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

•Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,

the warning message should not reappear.

If the message is still displayed, drive the

vehicle for several minutes at a speed of

20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the

message.

•Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be

fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.

Volvo does not recommend moving sen-

sors back and forth between sets of

wheels.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press

the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the

valve to help avoid bending or otherwise

damaging the valve.

NOTE

•If you change to tires with a different

recommended inflation pressure, the

TPMS system must be recalibrated to

these tires. On U.S. models, this must

be done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician. On Canadian mod-

els, see the following section "Recali-

brating TPMS."

•If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-

sor is moved to another wheel, the sen-

sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be

replaced.

•When installing TPMS sensors, the

vehicle must be parked for at least

15 minutes with the ignition off. If the

vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a

TPMS error message will be displayed.

Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models

only)

In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca-

librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-

mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

296

tion pressure table on page 276), for example,

if higher inflation pressure is necessary when

transporting heavy loads, etc.

This is done in the vehicle's menu system (see

page 129).

To recalibrate:

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and

put the ignition in mode I or II (see page

81 for additional information).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-

sole control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tire pressure

4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire

pressure and press OK/MENU again.

5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above

25 mph (40 km/h) continuously for at least

1 minute.

> When the calibration message is no

longer displayed, TPMS has been reca-

librated to the new inflation pressure.

Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian

models only)

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page

81 for additional information).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-

sole control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tire pressure

4. Select Tire pressure system ON/Off and

press OK/MENU.

07 Wheels and tires

297

298

Volvo maintenance................................................................................ 300

Maintaining your car............................................................................. 301

Hood and engine compartment............................................................ 303

Engine oil............................................................................................... 304

Fluids..................................................................................................... 306

Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 308

Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 315

Battery................................................................................................... 317

Fuses..................................................................................................... 320

Vehicle care........................................................................................... 328

MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS

08 Maintenance and specifications

Volvo maintenance

300

Introduction

Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance

program outlined in the Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet. This mainte-

nance program contains inspections and serv-

ices necessary for the proper function of your

vehicle. The maintenance services contain

several checks that require special tools and

training, and therefore must be performed by a

qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top

condition, specify time-tested and proven

Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle

manufacturers to furnish written instructions to

the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper

servicing and function of the components that

control emissions. These services, which are

listed in the "Warranty and Service Records

Information" booklet, are not covered by the

warranty. You will be required to pay for labor

and material used.

Maintenance

Your Volvo passed several major inspections

before it was delivered to you, in accordance

with Volvo specifications. The maintenance

procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-

ice Records Information booklet, many of

which will positively affect your vehicle's emis-

sions, should be performed as indicated. It is

recommended that receipts for vehicle emis-

sion maintenance be retained in case ques-

tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec-

tion and maintenance should also be per-

formed anytime a malfunction is observed or

suspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-

dian regulations, the following list of warranties

is provided.

•New Vehicle Limited Warranty

•Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

•Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

•Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tems Limited Warranty

•Emission Design and Defect Warranty

•Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other warran-

ties are provided as required by state/provin-

cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet for

detailed information concerning each of the

warranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimize

emissions

Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-

cle running well. Your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet provides a com-

prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up

to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main-

tenance. The schedule includes components

that affect vehicle emissions. This page

describes some of the emission-related com-

ponents.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

301

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-

vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried out

between the normally scheduled maintenance

services.

Each time the car is refueled:

•Check the engine oil level.

•Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,

headlights, and tail lights.

Monthly:

•Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect

the tires for wear.

•Check that engine coolant and other fluid

levels are between the indicated "min" and

"max" markings.

•Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass

cleaner and soft paper towels.

•Wipe driver information displays with a soft

cloth.

•Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-

rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-

minal connector, or a battery near the end

of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo

retailer for additional information.

As needed:

Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to

reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup

of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt

residues.

Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at

the base of the windshield, and from other pla-

ces where they may collect.

NOTE

Complete service information for qualified

technicians is available online for purchase

or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the

two jack attachments points should be used.

They are specially reinforced to bear the weight

of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed

under the front of the engine support frame.

Take care not to damage the splash guard

under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi-

tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it.

Always use axle stands or similar structures.

If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the

front and rear lift arm pads should be centered

under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard

edge of the sill rail (see illustration).

Emission inspection readiness

What is an Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II)?

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized

engine management system. It stores diagnos-

tic information about your vehicle's emission

controls. It can light the Check Engine light

(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A

"fault" is a component or system that is not

performing within an expected range. A fault

may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will

store a message about any fault.

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to a

vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can

then read "faults." In some states, this type of

08 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

302

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission

test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-

tion for any of the following reasons.

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your

vehicle may fail inspection.

•If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,

but went out without any action on your

part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.

Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending

on the inspection practices in your area.

•If you had recent service that required dis-

connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic

information may be incomplete and "not

ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not

ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or

was lit but went out without service, have

your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,

serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

•If you recently had service for a lit Check

Engine light, or if you had service that

required disconnecting the battery, a

period of driving is necessary to bring the

OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A

half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

way driving is typically needed to allow

OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo

retailer can provide you with more infor-

mation on planning a trip.

•Maintain your vehicle in accordance with

your vehicle's maintenance schedule.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Hood and engine compartment

303

Opening and closing the hood

G031911

Pull the lever located under the left side of

the dash to release the hood lock. An infor-

mation symbol will illuminate when the

hood is open.

Lift the hood slightly. Press the release

control (located under the right front edge

of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood

WARNING

Check that the hood locks properly when

closed.

Engine compartment, overview

The appearance of the engine compartment

may vary depending on engine model.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick

Radiator

Filler cap for engine oil

Cover over brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay and fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Air cleaner

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue to

operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine

has been switched off.

WARNING

The ignition should always be completely

switched off before performing any opera-

tions in the engine compartment.

The distributor ignition system operates at

very high voltages. Special safety precau-

tions must be followed to prevent injury.

Always turn the ignition off when:

•Replacing distributor ignition compo-

nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

•Do not touch any part of the distributor

ignition system while the engine is run-

ning. This may result in unintended

movements and body injury.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

304

Checking the engine oil

The oil level should be checked at regular inter-

vals, particularly during the period up to the

first scheduled maintenance service.

•See page 342 for oil specifications.

•Refer to the Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for information on the

oil change intervals.

CAUTION

•Not checking the oil level regularly can

result in serious engine damage if the oil

level becomes too low.

•Oil that is lower than the specified qual-

ity can damage the engine.

•Volvo does not recommend the use of

oil additives.

•Always add oil of the same type and

viscosity as already used.

•Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This

could cause an increase in oil consump-

tion.

Checking and adding oil

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products

NOTE

Before checking the oil:

•The car should be parked on a level sur-

face.

•If the engine is warm, wait for at least

10 – 15 minutes after the engine has

been switched off.

G021737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks on the dipstick

Checking the oil

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-

free rag.

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check

the oil level. The level must be between the

MIN and MAX marks.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

305

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to

the MIN mark, add approximately

0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.

4. Recheck the level and add more oil if nec-

essary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into

contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

NOTE

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is

changed at the normal maintenance inter-

vals except at owner request and at addi-

tional charge. Please consult your Volvo

retailer.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

306

Coolant

Location of the coolant reservoir

Normally, the coolant does not need to be

changed. If the system must be drained, con-

sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

See page 343 for information on cooling sys-

tem capacities.

CAUTION

•If necessary, top up the cooling system

with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze

only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-

freeze).

•Different types of antifreeze/coolant

may not be mixed.

•If the cooling system is drained, it

should be flushed with clean water or

premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled

with the correct mixture of water/anti-

freeze.

•The cooling system must always be

kept filled to the correct level, and the

level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there

can be high local temperatures in the

engine which could result in damage.

Check coolant regularly!

•Do not top up with water only. This

reduces the rust-protective and anti-

freeze qualities of the coolant and has a

lower boiling point. It can also cause

damage to the cooling system if it

should freeze.

•Do not use chlorinated tap water in the

vehicle's cooling system.

WARNING

•Never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle

cools.

•If it is necessary to top off the coolant

when the engine is warm, unscrew the

expansion tank cap slowly so that the

overpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

Checking the level

The fluid reservoir is concealed under the

round cover at the rear of the engine compart-

ment. The round cover must be removed first

before the reservoir cap can be accessed.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

307

The brake fluid should always be between the

MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res-

ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that

there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F

(280 °C), P/N 9437433

Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord-

ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet.

When driving under extremely hard conditions

(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to

replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

Always entrust brake fluid changing to a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a brake-related

message is shown in the information

display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician and have the brake

system inspected.

•Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any

other type of brake fluid.

Filling

1. Turn and open the cover.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.

The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks.

Power steering fluid

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

require changing. The fluid level must be

between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-

ties and recommended fluid grade, see

page 343.

WARNING

If a problem should occur in the power

steering system or if the vehicle has no elec-

trical current and must be towed, it is still

possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep

in mind that greater effort will be required to

turn the steering wheel.

CAUTION

Keep the area around the power steering

fluid reservoir clean when checking.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

308 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

All bulb specifications are listed on page 314.

The following bulbs should only be replaced by

a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian:

•Dome lighting, reading lights

•Glove compartment lighting

•Footwell lighting

•Turn signals in the door mirrors

•Approach lighting in the door mirrors

•Brake/fog/taillights

•Rear parking lights

•Active Bending Lights

•LED bulbs

NOTE

For information regarding any other bulbs

not mentioned in this section, please con-

tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and

authorized Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•Active Bending Lights* – due to the high

voltage used by these headlights, these

bulbs should only be replaced by a

trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

•Turn off the lights and remove the

remote key from the ignition before

changing any bulbs.

Headlight housing

WARNING

•The engine should not be running when

changing bulbs.

•If the engine has been running just prior

to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous-

ing, please keep in mind that compo-

nents in the engine compartment will be

hot.

The entire headlight housing must be lifted out

when replacing all front bulbs.

CAUTION

Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin-

gers. Grease and oils from your fingers

vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit

on the reflector, which will damage it.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

309

NOTE

•Always switch off the ignition before

starting to replace a bulb.

•The optional Active Bending Light bulbs

contain trace amounts of mercury.

These bulbs should always be disposed

of by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician.

Removing the headlight housing

1. Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing

the START/STOP ENGINE button and

remove the remote key from the ignition

slot1.

2. (Upper illustration under "Headlight hous-

ing")

Withdraw the headlight housing's lock-

ing pins.

Pull the headlight housing straight out.

CAUTION

When disconnecting the connector, pull on

the connector itself and not on the wiring.

3. (Lower illustration under "Headlight hous-

ing")

Unplug the wiring connector by holding

down the clip with your thumb.

Pull out the connector with the other

hand.

4. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft

surface to avoid scratching the lens.

5. Replace the defective bulb(s).

Reinserting the headlight housing

When reinserting the housing, be sure that the

long locking pin (to the left in the illustration) is

securely in place in both of its retaining clamps.

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into

place.

2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking

pins. Check that they are correctly

inserted. The headlight housing must be

properly inserted and secured in place

before the lighting is switched on or the

remote key is inserted into the ignition slot.

3. Check that the lights function properly.

The headlight wiring must be connected and

the housing must be securely in place before

the ignition is switched on.

Removing the cover to access the

bulbs

1Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

310

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 308.

1. Open the retaining clamps by pressing

them to the sides.

2. Pull the cover straight out.

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

Low beam, Halogen

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 308).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 309).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder

downward.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it

snaps into place. It can only be secured in

one position.

6. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

High beam, Halogen

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 308).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 309).

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-

clockwise and pulling it straight out.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn

it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be

secured in one position.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing.

7. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 308).

2Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

311

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 309).

3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the

bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the headlight

housing by pulling it straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the holder until it snaps

in place. It can only be inserted in one way.

6. Press the bulb holder into position in the

headlight housing.

7. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb

holder.

8. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

Turn signals

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 308).

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-

terclockwise and pulling it out of the head-

light housing.

3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.

4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it

in slightly and turning it counterclockwise.

5. Press the new bulb into the holder and turn

it clockwise.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing and turn it clockwise.

7. Reinstall the headlight housing.

Side marker lights

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 308.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 308).

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-

terclockwise and pulling it out of the head-

light housing.

3. Pull out the burned out bulb and install a

new one. It can only be inserted in one

position.

4. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing and turn it clockwise.

5. Reinstall the headlight housing.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

312

Rear fog light

The rear fog light (located on the driver's side

of the vehicle) can be reached from behind the

bumper

1. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it

in and turning it counterclockwise.

3. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it

clockwise.

4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise.

Location of taillight bulbs

Taillight lens, right side

Parking/side marker lights (LED)

Side reflector

Brake light

Backup light

Turn signal

Brake lights (LED)

NOTE

If an error message remains in the display

after a faulty bulb has been replaced, con-

tact an authorized Volvo workshop.

Brake lights and taillights

The brake lights and taillights are replaced from

inside the cargo area.

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 308.

1. Open the panel.

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it

in and turning it counterclockwise.

4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it

clockwise.

5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

313

License plate lighting

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing

and pull it out.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and

tighten the screws.

Cargo area lighting

G031942

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 308.

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that

the bulb housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press

it back into the bulb housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Removing the mirror glass

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower

edge, in the center, turn and carefully pry

up the lug on the edge.

2. Carefully detach and lift out the entire mir-

ror glass.

3. Replace the bulb.

Reinstalling the mirror glass

1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-

ror glass back into position.

2. Press the three lower lugs back into posi-

tion.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

314

Bulb specifications

Lighting

function

Wattage Bulb

Active Bend-

ing Lights

(extra high

beam)

65 H9

Low beam

(halogen)

55 H7

High beam

(halogen)

65 H9

Front turn sig-

nals

21 PY21W

Cargo area

lighting,

license plate

lighting

5 Festoon

bulb

SV5.5

Vanity mirror 1.2 Festoon

bulb

SV5.5

Front side

marker lights

5 W3W

Glove com-

partment

lighting

5 Festoon

bulb

SV8.5

08 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

315

Wiper blades

The windshield wiper blades are different

lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer

than the one on the passenger side.

Service position

Wiper blades in service position

The wiper blades must be in the vertical (serv-

ice) position for replacement, washing or to lift

them away from the windshield when e.g.,

removing ice or snow. To put them in this posi-

tion:

1. While sitting in the driver's seat, close the

driver's door.

2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot1

3. Put the ignition in mode II (see page 81).

4. With the remote key in the ignition slot1, put

the ignition in mode 0.

5. Move the right steering wheel lever up and

hold it for at least 1 second. The wipers will

then move to the vertical (service) position

on the windshield.

The wipers can be returned to the normal posi-

tion by briefly switching on the ignition (or by

starting the engine).

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

With the wipers in the service position, fold

out the wiper arm from the windshield.

Press the button on the wiper blade attach-

ment and pull the wiper blade straight out,

parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks

into place.

Check that the blade is securely in place.

1Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

316

Cleaning

Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean

helps improve visibility and prolongs the serv-

ice life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper

blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm

soap solution or car washing detergent.

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

G032770

1. Fold the wiper arm outward.

2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at

the arrow).

3. Pull out the blade to release it from the

wiper arm.

4. Press the new wiper blade into place and

check that it seats securely.

5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate

window.

Filling washer fluid

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

The windshield and headlight washers share a

common reservoir.

The washer fluid reservoir is located on the

driver's side of the engine compartment. Dur-

ing cold weather, the reservoir should be filled

with windshield washer solvent containing

antifreeze. For capacities, see page 343.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

317

Warning symbols on the battery

Wear protective goggles.

Keep away from children.

Avoid smoking, open flames,

and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

Contains corrosive acid.

Risk of explosion

Recycle properly

NOTE

A used battery should be disposed of in an

environmentally responsible manner. Con-

sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to

a recycling station.

Handling

•Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running (for example, when

replacing the battery).

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as driving conditions and cli-

mate. Extreme cold may also further

decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for

an extended period of time or if the vehicle

is usually only driven short distances.

•Never use a quick charger to charge the

battery.

WARNING

•Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-

tact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medical

help immediately if eyes are affected.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it

becomes discharged repeatedly.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

318

Maintenance

•Use a screw driver to open the caps or

cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

•If necessary, add distilled water. The level

should never be above the indicator.

•The fluid level should be checked if the

battery has been recharged.

•After inspection, be sure the cap over each

battery cell or the cover is securely in

place.

•Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and properly tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running, or when the key is in the

ignition. This could damage the vehicle's

electrical system.

•The battery should be disconnected from

the vehicle when a battery charger is used

directly on the battery.

•To help keep the battery in good condition,

the vehicle should be driven for at least 15

minutes a week or connected to a charger

with an automatic charging function.

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

Keeping the battery fully charged helps

prolong its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as driving conditions and cli-

mate. Extreme cold may also further

decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for

an extended period of time or if the vehicle

is usually only driven short distances.

CAUTION

•Always use distilled or deionized water

(battery water).

•Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

Changing

08 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

319

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive and

negative cables in the correct sequence.

Removal

Switch off the ignition and wait at least

5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so

that all information in the vehicle's electrical

system can be stored in the control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover and

remove the cover.

Release the rubber moulding so that the

rear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the

battery

Loosen the screw holding the battery

clamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

Installation

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side

until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the

clamp.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the cold section moulding. (See

Removal).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with

the clips. (See Removal).

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

320

Replacing fuses

There are relay/fuse boxes located in the

engine compartment, the passenger compart-

ment, and the cargo area.

If an electrical component fails to function, this

may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way

to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.

To do so:

1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult

to remove, a special fuse removal tool is

located on the inside of the engine com-

partment fuse box cover.

2. From the side, examine the curved metal

wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the

same color and amperage (written on the fuse).

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical

system inspected by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with higher

amperage than those stated on the follow-

ing pages. Doing so could seriously damage

or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

Location of the fuse boxes

Under the glove compartment

Cargo area

Engine compartment

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

321

Engine compartment

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

Positions

These fuses are all located in the engine com-

partment box. Fuses in are located under

NOTE

•Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be

changed at any time when necessary.

•Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/

circuit breakers and should only be

removed or replaced by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•There is a special fuse removal tool on

the underside of the cover.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker 50

Circuit breaker 60

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker 60

–

Headlight washers* 20

Windshield wipers 30

–

Climate system blower 40

–

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

–

Active Bending Lights-

headlight leveling*

Central electrical module 20

ABS 15 feed 5

Speed-dependent steering

force*

Pos Function A

Engine Control Module

(ECM), transmission, SRS

Heated washer nozzles* 10

Vacuum pump I5T 5

Lighting panel 5

Engine compartment box 5

Auxiliary lights* 20

Horn 15

Engine Control Module

(ECM)

Control module, automatic

transmission

Compressor A/C 15

Relay coils 5

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

323

Pos Function A

Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Engine Control Module

(ECM), throttle

Injection system 15

Engine valves 10

EVAP/heated oxygen sen-

sor/Injection

Crank case ventilation

heater

Fuel leakage detection 5

–

Cooling fan 80

Electro-hydraulic power

steering

100

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse

boxes.

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

2. The fuses are accessible.

Positions-fuse box A

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker - audio sys-

tem, subwoofer*

Pos Function A

12-volt socket (cargo area) 15

Controls in driver's door 20

Controls in front passeng-

er's door

Pos Function A

Controls in right rear pas-

senger's door

Controls in left rear pas-

senger's door

Keyless drive* 20

Power driver's seat* 20

Power front passenger's

seat*

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 325

Pos Function A

Folding rear seat head

restraints*

Audio system, Navigation

system display*

Audio system 15

Bluetooth hands-free sys-

tem

Laminated panoramic roof*

Courtesy lighting

Climate system sensor

12-volt sockets 15

Heated front passenger's

seat*

Heated driver's seat* 15

Heated rear passenger's

seat (right)*

Pos Function A

Heated rear passenger's

seat (left)*

Park assist*, Volvo Naviga-

tion System*, Park assist

camera*

All Wheel Drive* control

module

Active chassis system* 10

Positions-fuse box B

Pos Function A

Tailgate wiper 15

Front courtesy lighting,

power seat(s)*

7.5

Instrument panel informa-

tion display

Adaptive cruise control/

collision warning*

Courtesy lighting, rain sen-

sor*

7.5

Pos Function A

Steering wheel module 7.5

Cental locking: fuel filler

door/trunk lid

Tailgate window washer 15

Windshield washer 15

Tailgate unlock 10

Tailgate lock 10

Fuel pump 20

Remote key receiver, Alarm

movement sensor*, Climate

system

Alarm, On-board diagnos-

tic system

Airbag system, Occupant

weight system

Adaptive cruise control

front radar*

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pos Function A

Accelerator pedal, Power

door mirrors, Heated rear

seats*

7.5

Brake lights 5

Laminated panoramic roof* 20

Immobilizer 5

08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 327

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions

Pos Rear fuse box A

Electric parking brake (left

side)

Electric parking brake (right

side)

Heated rear window 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

Power tailgate* 30

Pos Rear fuse box A

Trailer socket 1* 40

08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

328

Washing the car

The following points should be kept in mind

when washing and cleaning the car:

•The car should be washed at regular inter-

vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots

adhere to the paint and may cause dam-

age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic-

ularly important to wash the car frequently

in the wintertime.

•Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.

Doing so may cause detergents and wax

to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid

scratching, use lukewarm water to soften

the dirt before you wash with a soft

sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

•Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork

as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish

may be permanently damaged.

•A detergent can be used to facilitate the

softening of dirt and oil.

•Dry the car with a clean chamois and

remember to clean the drain holes in the

doors and rocker panels.

•Tar spots can be removed with tar remover

after the car has been washed.

•A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy

water can be used to clean the wiper

blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-

shield and wiper blades improves visibility

considerably and also helps prolong the

service life of the wiper blades.

•Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel

housings, fenders, etc).

•In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-

quent washing is recommended.

NOTE

When washing the car, remember to remove

dirt from the drain holes in the doors and

sills.

CAUTION

•During high pressure washing, the

spray mouthpiece must never be closer

to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not

spray into the locks.

•Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can

reduce lighting capacity considerably.

Clean the headlights regularly, for

example when refueling.

Special laminated panoramic roof cau-

tions:

•Always close the laminated panoramic

roof and sun shade before washing your

vehicle.

•Never use abrasive cleaning agents on

the laminated panoramic roof.

•Never use wax on the rubber seals

around the laminated panoramic roof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning

products, available at your Volvo retailer, for

cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental

components such as chromed strips on the

exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for

using these products should be followed care-

fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be

used.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

329

CAUTION

•Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-

ber components

•Polishing chromed strips can wear

away or damage the surface

•Polishes containing abrasive sub-

stances should not be used

Automatic car wash

•We do NOT recommend washing your car

in an automatic wash during the first few

months (because the paint will not have

hardened sufficiently).

•An automatic wash is a simple and quick

way to clean your car, but it is worth

remembering that it may not be as thor-

ough as when you yourself go over the car

with sponge and water. Keeping the under-

body clean is most important, especially in

the winter. Some automatic washers do

not have facilities for washing the under-

body.

CAUTION

•Before driving into an automatic car

wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to

avoid damaging the windshield wipers.

•Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil-

iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any

antenna(s) are retracted or removed.

Otherwise there is risk of the machine

dislodging them.

•Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-

plated wheels using the same deter-

gents used for the body of the vehicle.

Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can

permanently stain chrome-plated

wheels.

WARNING

•When the vehicle is driven immediately

after being washed, apply the brakes,

including the parking brake, several

times in order to remove any moisture

from the brake linings.

•Engine cleaning agents should not be

used when the engine is warm. This

constitutes a fire risk.

Exterior lighting

Condensation may form temporarily on the

inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as

headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-

mal and the lights are designed to withstand

moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-

pate after the lights have been on for a short

time.

Polishing and waxing

•Normally, polishing is not required during

the first year after delivery, however, wax-

ing may be beneficial.

•Before applying polish or wax the vehicle

must be washed and dried. Tar spots can

be removed with kerosene or tar remover.

Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing

compound.

•After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

•Several commercially available products

contain both polish and wax.

•Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-

ishing a dull surface.

•A wide range of polymer-based waxes can

be purchased today. These waxes are easy

to use and produce a long-lasting, high-

gloss finish that protects the bodywork

against oxidation, road dirt and fading.

•Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct

sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should

not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

330

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of long-

life or durable paint protection coatings,

some of which may claim to prevent pitting,

fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have

not been tested by Volvo for compatibility

with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them

may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,

or cloud. Damage caused by application of

paint protection coatings may not be cov-

ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-

ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly

and follow the instructions included with the

car care product.

Upholstery care

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For

more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,

shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric

stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Alcantera

suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a

soft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured

with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,

sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the

protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and

fading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy

leather care kit formulated to clean and beau-

tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the

protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner

removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream

protectant restores a barrier against soil and

sunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener that

should be applied after the cleaner and pro-

tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and

reduces friction between leather and other fin-

ishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and

conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four

times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about

Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-

ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge

and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the

sponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the

sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,

do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a

towel, and allow the leather to dry com-

pletely.

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on

a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream

to the upholstery with light circular move-

ments.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining and

protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

331

CAUTION

•Under no circumstances should gaso-

line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents

be used on the plastic or the leather

since these can cause damage.

•Take extra care when removing stains

such as ink or lipstick since the coloring

can spread.

•Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-

vent can damage the seat padding.

•Start from the outside of the stain and

work toward the center.

•Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a

pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing

may damage the textile upholstery.

•Clothing that is not colorfast, such as

new jeans or suede garments, may stain

the upholstery.

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild

soap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed

clean regularly, especially during winter when

they should be taken out for drying. Spots on

textile mats can be removed with a mild deter-

gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec-

ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.

Consult your Volvo retailer.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood

surfaces

Cleaning interior plastic components should

be done with a cleaning agent specially

designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo

retailer.

Touching up paintwork

Paint code on the model plate1

Paint damage requires immediate attention to

avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish

regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.

Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment and

skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any exten-

sive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by using

Volvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Make sure you have the right color. The color

code number is stated on the model plate.

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

•Primer – can

•Paint – touch-up pen

•Brush

•Masking tape

If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare

metal and an undamaged color coat remains,

you can add paint immediately after removing

dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should be

clean and dry. The surface temperature

should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

1see page 336 for the location of the model plate.

08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

332

Minor scratches on the surface

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to

the metal and an undamaged layer of paint

remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as

soon as the spot has been cleaned.

Repairing stone chips

G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-

aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any

loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with

a small brush.

3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint

can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint

thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats

and let dry after each application.

4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want

to protect surrounding paint by masking it

off

5. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount

of polish.

08 Maintenance and specifications

333

334

Label information.................................................................................. 336

Specifications........................................................................................ 338

Overview of information and warning symbols..................................... 345

Volvo programs..................................................................................... 348

SPECIFICATIONS

09 Specifications

Label information

336

Location of labels

09 Specifications

Label information

337

List of labels

Model

plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The

model plate is located on the rear side of

the B-pillar (the pillar between the front and

rear passenger doors) and the rear pas-

senger's door must be open in order to see

it.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min-

istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards

(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet

all applicable safety standards, as evi-

denced by the certification label on the

driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-

ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of

the driver's door opening). For further infor-

mation regarding these regulations, please

consult your Volvo retailer.

Tire inflation

pressures. This label indicates the correct

inflation pressures for the tires that were on

the vehicle when it left the factory. Cana-

dian models have the upper decal; U.S.

models have the lower one.

Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top

left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN) should always

be quoted in all correspondence concern-

ing your vehicle with the retailer and when

ordering parts.

Vehicle Emission Control Information.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-

cable emission standards, as evidenced by

the certification label on the underside of

the hood. For further information regarding

these regulations, please consult your

Volvo retailer.

09 Specifications

Specifications

338

Dimensions

Dimension In. (mm)

A Wheelbase 109.2 (2774)

B Length 182.2 (4628)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 70.4 (1789)

D Load length, floor 38.3 (972)

E Height 67.4 (1713)

F Load height 31.6 (802)

G Track, front 64.3 (1632)

09 Specifications

Specifications

339

Dimension In. (mm)

H Track, rear 62.4 (1586)

I Load width, floor 42.9 (1090)

J Width 74.4 (1891)

K Width, incl. door mirrors 84.3 (2142)

Weights

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 6-cyl. FWDA: 5200 lbs

6-cyl. AWDB: 5355 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 2360 kg

6-cyl. AWD:2430 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:2440 kg

Capacity weight 950 lbs (all models) 430 kg (all models

Permissible axle weights, front 6-cyl. FWD: 2740 lbs

6-cyl. AWD: 2800 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2840 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 1245 kg

6-cyl. AWD:1270 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:1290 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear 6-cyl. FWD: 2545 lbs

6-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2645 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 1155 kg

6-cyl. AWD:1200 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:1200 kg

Curb weight 3900 - 4140 lbs 1770 – 1900 kg

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

09 Specifications

Specifications

340

Category USA Canada

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs

With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs

Without brakes: 750 kg

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg

With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

AFWD = Front Wheel Drive

BAWD = All Wheel Drive

Engine specifications

Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA

Engine designation B6324S5 B6324S4 B6304T4

Output (kW/rps) 179/107 171/108 224/93

Output (hp/rpm) 240/6400 230/6500 300/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 320/53 300/55 440/35 – 70

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 236/3200 221/3300 325/2100 – 4200

No. of cylinders 6 6 6

Bore (in/mm) 3.3/84 3.3/84 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.78/96 3.78/96 3.67/93.2

09 Specifications

Specifications

341

Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA

Displacement 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.3:1 9.3:1

AThis engine may not be available on all markets

09 Specifications

Specifications

342

Engine oil

Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC

specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.

Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel

economy, engine performance, or engine pro-

tection.

Volvo recommends Castrol.

Depending on your driving habits, premium or

synthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ-

omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo

retailer for recommendations on premium or

synthetic oils.

Oil additives must not be used.

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is

changed at the normal maintenance services.

This oil is only used at customer request, at

additional charge. Please consult your Volvo

retailer.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life

under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

good fuel economy and engine protection. See

the viscosity chart.

G023491

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40

and complying with oil quality requirements are

recommended for driving in areas of sustained

temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow-

ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro-

longed driving in mountainous areas.

American Petroleum Institute (API)

symbol

G022917

The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into

three parts:

•The upper section describes the oil's per-

formance level.

•The center identifies the oil's viscosity.

•The lower section indicates whether the oil

has demonstrated energy-conserving

properties in a standard test in comparison

to a reference oil.

09 Specifications

Specifications

343

Oil volume

Engine model Volume (incl. filter)

3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S4/S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume Specification

Transmission oilAAutomatic (TF-80SC) 7.4 US qts (7 liters) Transmission fluid AW-1

Coolant 3.2 (6-cyl.) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor

mixed with water (50/50 mix), see

packaging.

3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters)

Air conditioning All models 1.7 lbs (770 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a),

PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4+

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS

M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)

4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB)

Use a washer antifreeze recom-

mended by Volvo, mixed with

water.

Fuel tank volume 3.0T/3.2 6 cyl. 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

AUnder normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

BModels without headlight washers

09 Specifications

Specifications

344

Electrical system

General information

12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-

nator. Single pole system in which the chassis

and engine block are used as conductors. The

negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

Performance, battery

Engine 3.2 6-cyl./3.0T

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 135

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

If the battery is replaced, replace it with a

battery of the same cold start capacity and

reserve capacity as the original (see the

decal on the battery).

09 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 345

Introduction

The symbols in the vehicle's various displays

are divided into three main categories:

•Warning symbols

•Indicator symbols

•Information symbols

The following tables list the most common

symbols, their meaning and the pages in this

manual that provide more detailed information.

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol lights up to

indicate a problem related to safety and/or

drivability. A message will also appear in the

main instruments panel's display.

Information symbol

The information symbol lights up and a

text message is displayed to provide the driver

with necessary information about one of the

vehicle's systems.

Symbols in the main instrument panel

Warning symbols

Symbol Description P.

no.

Low oil pressure 78

Parking brake 78

SRS airbags 78

Seat belt reminder 79

Generator not charg-

ing

Fault in the brake sys-

tem

Warning symbol 79

ACanadian models

Indicator symbols

Symbol Description P.

no.

Fault in the Active

Bending Light

(ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator

light

Anti-lock brake sys-

tem (ABS)

Rear fog light on 77

Stability system

(DSTC), Hill Descent

Control, Trailer Stabil-

ity Assist*

Tire pressure monitor-

ing sensor (TPMS)

Low fuel level 77

09 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

346 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Description P.

no.

Information symbol,

see text in information

display

High beam indicator 76

Left turn signal indica-

tor

Right turn signal indi-

cator

ACanadian models

Other information symbols

Symbol Description P.

no.

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *

151,

157

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *

151,

157

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *, Distance Alert*

151,

157,

159

Symbol Description P.

no.

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *, Distance Alert*

151,

157,

159

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *

151,

157

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *, Distance Alert*

151,

157,

159

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *, Distance Alert*

151,

157,

159

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol*

151,

157

Radar sensor* 155

Camera*

Laser sensor*

171

Symbol Description P.

no.

Collision Warning with

Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection*

173

Driver Alert System* 175

Active Bending Lights

(ABL)*

Fuel filler door (arrow

indicates it is on right

side of vehicle)

Rain sensor* 95

Driver Alert System* 176

Driver Alert System*,

Lane Departure Warn-

ing*

178

09 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 347

Symbol Description P.

no.

Driver Alert System*,

Lane Departure Warn-

ing*

178

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *

151,

157

Information symbols in the center

console display

Symbol Description P.

no.

Audio files 219

CD folder 219

Video files 219

Bluetooth-connected

cell phone

230

BluetoothTM hands-

free

230

HD radio

Park Assist* 181

Information symbols in the ceiling

console

Symbol Description P.

no.

Seat belt reminder 19

Occupant Weight

Sensor

09 Specifications

Volvo programs

348

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON

CALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-

tion, features, and benefits are described in a

separate information package in your glove

compartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-

VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-

ports certification by the National Institute for

Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-

fied technicians have demonstrated a high

degree of competence in specific areas.

Besides passing exams, each technician must

also have worked in the field for two or more

years before a certificate is issued. These pro-

fessional technicians are best able to analyze

vehicle problems and perform the necessary

maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at

peak operating condition.

09 Specifications

349

10 Index

350

1, 2, 3 ...

12-volt sockets........................................ 195

ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 116

Accessory installation warning.................. 13

Active chassis system............................. 146

Active yaw control................................... 144

Adaptive brake lights............................... 115

Adaptive cruise control.................... 149, 151

Airbags

disconnecting the front passenger’s

side................................................. 26, 27

front...................................................... 22

inflatable curtain................................... 32

side impact........................................... 30

Air conditioning........................................ 139

Air distribution.......................................... 135

Air distribution table................................. 141

Air vents................................................... 136

All Wheel Drive......................................... 114

Anti-freeze....................................... 248, 306

Anti-lock brake system

warning light......................................... 76

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 116

Approach lighting................................ 58, 93

Audio system

AUX/USB sockets............................... 223

Bluetooth devices............................. 226

Bluetooth hands-free system........... 229

Bluetooth streaming audio................. 226

general functions................................ 207

getting started.................................... 202

HD digital radio................................... 212

introduction......................................... 200

media player....................................... 219

menus................................................. 241

overview.............................................. 200

radio functions.................................... 210

Sirius satellite radio............................ 214

sound settings.................................... 208

steering wheel keypad........................ 205

voice control....................................... 237

Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 101

Automatic locking retractor....................... 38

Automatic transmission

Geartronic................................... 112, 113

general description..................... 112, 113

oil........................................................ 343

shiftlock override................................ 113

Axle weight.............................................. 280

Battery

changing..................................... 318, 319

maintenance....................................... 318

remote key, replacing........................... 61

specifications...................................... 344

warning symbols................................. 317

Black box................................................... 11

Blind Spot Information System

(BLIS)....................................... 189, 190, 191

Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 229

Booster cushion, integrated...................... 49

Booster cushions....................................... 45

Brake lights.............................................. 115

Brake system

ABS..................................................... 116

checking fluid level............................. 306

emergency brake assistance.............. 116

fluid..................................................... 343

general information............................. 115

10 Index

351

Hill Descent Control............................ 121

warning light......................................... 78

Bulbs

cargo area lighting.............................. 313

headlights........................... 308, 309, 310

introduction......................................... 308

license plate lights.............................. 313

side marker lights............................... 311

specifications...................................... 314

taillight................................................ 312

Camera, Park Assist................................ 185

Capacity weight....................................... 280

Cargo area

changing bulbs................................... 313

steel grid............................................. 259

Cargo area cover..................................... 259

Cargo area net......................................... 260

Catalytic converter................................... 253

Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 229

Cell phone voice control.......................... 237

Central locking system, introduction......... 56

Chains...................................................... 283

Check engine light..................................... 76

Child restraints

recalls and registration......................... 48

Child restraint systems.............................. 39

booster cushions.................................. 45

convertible seats.................................. 43

infant seats........................................... 41

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 46

top tether anchors................................ 47

Child safety.......................................... 37, 38

booster cushions.................................. 45

child restraint systems.......................... 39

convertible seats.................................. 43

infant seats........................................... 41

Child safety locks...................................... 52

City Safety™............................................ 162

Climate system........................................ 139

air distribution............................. 135, 141

air vents.............................................. 136

Interior Air Quality System.................. 135

introduction......................................... 134

passenger compartment filter............ 134

refrigerant........................................... 134

Clock, setting............................................. 80

Cold weather driving................................ 248

Collision warning system................. 168, 169

Compass in rearview mirror..................... 102

Conserving electrical current................... 247

Controls, center console.......................... 241

Convertible seats....................................... 43

Coolant............................................ 306, 343

Cooling system, general information....... 247

Courtesy lighting.................................. 92, 93

Crash mode............................................... 36

Cruise control.................................. 147, 148

adaptive.............................................. 149

Curb weight............................................. 280

Current, conserving................................. 247

Defroster.................................................. 139

Detachable key blade................................ 60

Dimensions.............................................. 338

Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-

bag....................................................... 26, 27

Dome lighting....................................... 92, 93

Door mirrors............................................. 100

Driver alert............................................... 175

10 Index

352

Driver distraction warning.......................... 13

Driving economically................................ 246

Driving in cold weather............................ 248

Driving through water.............................. 247

ECC................................................. 139, 140

Economical driving.................................. 246

Electric parking brake.............................. 118

Electronic Climate Control....... 137, 139, 140

air distribution table............................ 141

Interior Air Quality System.................. 140

Emergency locking retractor...................... 38

Emergency starting.................................. 110

Emergency towing........................... 265, 266

Emission inspection readiness................ 301

Engine

overheating........................................... 79

specifications...................................... 340

starting................................................ 109

switching off....................................... 110

Engine compartment overview................ 303

Engine Drag Control (EDC)...................... 144

Engine oil

checking............................................. 304

low pressure warning light.............. 77, 78

specifications...................................... 342

volumes.............................................. 343

Environment............................................... 12

Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 257

Federal Clean Air Act............................... 300

Fluid specifications.................................. 343

Fog lights

front/rear............................................... 91

rear...................................................... 312

Four C (active chassis system)................ 146

Front airbags.............................................. 22

disconnecting passenger’s side air-

bag.................................................. 26, 27

Front park assist.............................. 181, 183

Front seats........................................... 82, 84

Fuel filler cap........................................... 253

Fuel filler door, opening........................... 252

Fuel level warning light.............................. 77

Fuel requirements............................ 250, 251

Fuel tank volume..................................... 343

Fuses............................... 320, 321, 324, 327

Gasoline requirements............................. 251

Gas tank volume...................................... 343

Gauges...................................................... 75

Geartronic................................................ 113

Geartronic automatic transmission.. 112, 113

Generator warning light............................. 78

Glossary of tire terminology..................... 279

Grocery bag holder.................................. 257

Gross vehicle weight............................... 280

Hazard warning flashers............................ 91

HD digital radio........................................ 212

Headlights

Active Bending Lights........................... 90

changing bulbs........................... 309, 310

10 Index

353

high/low beams.................................... 89

high beam flash.................................... 89

Headlight washers..................................... 96

Head restraints, rear seat.......................... 85

Heated oxygen sensors........................... 254

Heated rear seats.................................... 138

High beams................................................ 89

indicator light........................................ 77

Hill Descent Control................................. 121

Hoisting the vehicle................................. 301

Home safe lighting..................................... 93

Hood, opening/closing............................ 303

Horn........................................................... 88

Ignition modes........................................... 81

Immobilizer................................................ 57

Important information.................................. 8

Indicator lights......................... 75, 76, 77, 78

Infant seats................................................ 41

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 32

Inflation pressure..................................... 273

Inflation pressure tables.................. 275, 276

Information and warning symbols, table

of.............................................................. 345

Information lights..................... 75, 76, 77, 78

Information symbol.................................... 77

Infotainment system................................ 200

AUX/USB sockets............................... 223

Bluetooth devices............................. 226

Bluetooth® hands-free system........... 229

general functions................................ 207

getting started.................................... 202

media player....................................... 219

menus................................................. 241

radio functions.................................... 210

sound settings.................................... 208

voice control....................................... 237

Inspection readiness................................ 301

Instrument lighting..................................... 89

Instrument overview............................ 74, 75

Instrument panel...................................... 126

Integrated two-stage booster cushion...... 49

Interior Air Quality System....................... 135

Interior lighting..................................... 92, 93

iPod connector (audio system)............. 223

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 46

Jack

attaching............................................. 291

location of........................................... 291

Jump starting........................................... 110

Key blade....................................... 56, 60, 63

Keyless drive

general description............................... 63

starting the vehicle............................. 109

Labels

list of................................................... 337

location of........................................... 336

Laminated panoramic roof...................... 103

LATCH anchors......................................... 46

Leather care............................................. 330

Lighting panel............................................ 89

Load anchoring eyelets........................... 257

10 Index

354

Loading the vehicle.......................... 255, 280

roof loads............................................ 258

Locking...................................................... 66

tailgate.................................................. 67

Locking the vehicle.................................... 58

Locks, child safety..................................... 52

Low beams................................................ 89

Low fuel level warning light........................ 77

Low oil pressure warning light................... 78

Main instrument panel............................. 126

Maintenance............................................ 300

hoisting the vehicle............................. 301

performed by the owner..................... 301

Malfunction indicator light......................... 76

Media player (infotainment system)......... 219

Menu........................................................ 128

Messages in the instrument panel........... 126

Mirrors

defroster............................................. 101

power door......................................... 100

rearview, auto-dim function................ 101

retractable........................................... 100

vanity.................................................. 195

Motor oil

checking............................................. 304

specifications...................................... 342

volumes.............................................. 343

MY CAR................................................... 128

Net in cargo area..................................... 260

Occupant safety........................................ 16

Occupant weight sensor...................... 26, 27

Octane recommendations....................... 251

Odometer, trip........................................... 80

Oil

checking............................................. 304

specifications...................................... 342

volumes.............................................. 343

On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 348

Overhead courtesy lighting.................. 92, 93

Overheating, engine................................... 79

Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 254

Paint, touching up.................................... 331

Park assist....................................... 181, 183

Park Assist Camera................................. 185

Parking brake

electric, applying/releasing................. 118

warning light......................................... 78

Parking lights............................................. 91

Personal Car Communicator, unique func-

tions........................................................... 59

Polishing.................................................. 329

Power front seat

memory function................................... 83

with keyless drive................................. 84

Power mirrors.......................................... 100

defroster............................................. 101

Power steering

fluid..................................................... 307

speed-dependent............................... 146

Power steering fluid................................. 343

10 Index

355

Power tailgate.......................................... 255

Power windows......................................... 98

laminated glass..................................... 99

Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 20

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 110, 319, 344

Radio

Sirius satellite radio............................ 214

Radio functions........................................ 210

HD digital radio................................... 212

Rain sensor................................................ 95

READ button............................................ 126

Rear fog light..................................... 91, 312

Rear park assist............................... 181, 183

Rear seat head restraints........................... 85

Rear seats

center head restraint............................. 85

folding................................................... 85

heated................................................. 138

Rearview mirror

auto-dim function............................... 101

compass............................................. 102

Rear window defroster............................ 101

Recalls, child restraints.............................. 48

Refrigerant............................................... 343

Refueling.......................................... 250, 251

fuel filler cap....................................... 253

fuel filler door...................................... 252

fuel tank volume................................. 343

Registering child restraints........................ 48

Remote key................................................ 56

approach lighting.................................. 58

immobilizer........................................... 57

key blade........................................ 56, 60

key memory.......................................... 57

locking the vehicle................................ 58

Personal Car Communicator.......... 58, 59

replacing the battery............................. 61

unlocking the vehicle............................ 58

Remote key/PCC

common functions................................ 58

Reporting safety defects............................ 17

Roadside Assistance............................... 348

Rollover Protection System (ROPS).......... 35

Roll Stability Control (RSC)........................ 35

Roof loads............................................... 258

Safety, occupant........................................ 16

Safety defects, reporting........................... 17

Seat belt

reminder................................................ 19

Seat belts

Automatic locking retractor/Emergency

locking retractor.................................... 38

buckling................................................ 18

maintenance......................................... 18

pretensioners........................................ 18

reminder................................................ 18

reminder warning light.......................... 78

securing child restraint sys-

tems.......................................... 41, 43, 45

unbuckling............................................ 18

use during pregnancy........................... 20

using..................................................... 18

Seats, front.......................................... 82, 83

Shiftlock..................................................... 11

Side door mirrors..................................... 100

Side impact airbags................................... 30

Side marker lights, changing bulbs......... 311

Sirius satellite radio.................................. 214

Snow chains............................................ 283

10 Index

356

Snow tires................................................ 283

Spare tire................................................. 284

Speed-dependent steering...................... 146

Spin control............................................. 144

SRS............................................................ 21

Stability system....................................... 144

Engine Drag Control (EDC)................. 144

indicator light........................................ 77

Starting the engine.................................. 109

with keyless drive............................... 109

Starting the vehicle

after a crash (crash mode).................... 36

Start inhibitor (immobilizer)........................ 57

Steel grid in cargo area............................ 259

Steering wheel

adjusting............................................... 88

horn....................................................... 88

keypad.................................. 88, 128, 205

Stone chips, touching up......................... 331

Storage spaces........................................ 193

Studded tires........................................... 283

Sunroof

laminated panoramic roof................... 103

Supplemental restraint system.................. 21

warning light......................................... 78

Symbols, overview................................... 345

Tailgate

driving with it open............................. 246

locking/unlocking.................................. 67

power operated.................................. 255

wiper/washer........................................ 96

Tailgate wipers......................................... 316

Taillights, changing bulbs........................ 312

Temporary spare tire............................... 284

Three-way catalytic converter................. 253

Tire designations..................................... 277

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 294, 295

indicator light........................................ 77

Tires......................................................... 270

age...................................................... 270

changing from summer to winter........ 271

glossary of terms................................ 279

improving economy............................ 270

inflation pressure................................ 273

inflation pressure tables............. 275, 276

load ratings......................................... 274

rotation............................................... 271

snow................................................... 283

spare................................................... 284

specifications...................................... 274

speed ratings...................................... 274

storing................................................. 271

studded............................................... 283

tire pressure monitoring system......... 294

tread wear indicator............................ 272

uniform tire quality grading................. 282

Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-

tems).......................................................... 47

Touching up paint.................................... 331

Towing a trailer................................ 262, 263

trailer hitch.......................................... 263

Towing the vehicle........................... 265, 266

Traction control........................................ 144

Trailer towing................................... 262, 263

trailer hitch.......................................... 263

Transmission

general description..................... 112, 113

oil........................................................ 343

shiftlock override................................ 113

Tread wear indicator................................ 272

Trip computer.......................................... 142

10 Index

357

Trip odometers.......................................... 80

Trips, long distance................................. 248

Turn signals............................................... 92

changing bulbs................................... 311

indicator lights...................................... 77

Two-stage booster cushion....................... 49

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 282

Unlocking the tailgate................................ 67

Unlocking the vehicle.......................... 58, 66

Upholstery care....................................... 330

Vanity mirror............................................ 195

changing bulbs................................... 313

Vehicle dimensions.................................. 338

Vehicle Event Data..................................... 11

Vehicle loading................................ 255, 280

roof loads............................................ 258

Vehicle maintenance................................ 300

performed by the owner..................... 301

Vehicle weights........................................ 339

Voice control

cell phones......................................... 237

Volvo and the environment........................ 12

Volvo maintenance.................................. 300

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 348

Volvo programs....................................... 348

Warning flashers, hazard........................... 91

Warning lights.......................... 75, 76, 77, 78

Warning symbol......................................... 79

Warning system, collision................ 168, 169

Warranties................................................ 300

Washer fluid..................................... 316, 343

Washers

headlight............................................... 96

windshield............................................. 95

Water, driving through............................. 247

Waxing..................................................... 329

Weights.................................................... 339

Wheels..................................................... 270

changing............................................. 291

storing................................................. 271

Whiplash Protection System..................... 33

Windows

power.................................................... 98

Windshield

IR coating............................................. 97

rain sensor............................................ 95

washers................................................ 96

wipers/washers..................................... 95

Windshield washer fluid................... 316, 343

Windshield wipers.................................... 315

Wiper blades

replacing tailgate wiper...................... 316

replacing windshield wipers............... 315

10 Index

358

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&'+('JH68VcVYV!6I&%)+!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%&%!8deng^\]i©'%%%"'%&%Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc

Volvo 2011 XC60 Owner's Manual Owners

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation